How did Big Pharma manage to develop a vaccine (sponsored by the WHO, GAVI, the Gates Foundation, et al.) with a mandate “to protect people” against a virus which has not been isolated/ purified?
How Beijing approaches the Myanmar maze is conditioned by four variables: natural gas; water; the drug trade; and the fractious clashes between the Tatmadaw and a dizzying patchwork of over 135 ethnic minorities.
Member of America’s Frontline Doctors Dr. Ryan Cole provides a scientific clarification of what these injections do in the head and other organs of the vaccinated people.
The pandemic I’m talking about is tyranny—the need to have power over others—to strip others of all they own including their dignity. In the case of COVID-19, with gene altering vaccines, they even want to strip us of what it means to be human.
Within 9 seconds one hundred thousand people were killed or doomed… And that’s what is on the drawing board of the Pentagon on a much larger scale, with a trillion dollar nuclear weapons program.
So far in Canada, “there has been a total of 206 reports of Bell’s Palsy following a Pfizer vaccination,” the health agency told Global News in an email Friday.
In an interview with U.S. News & World Report, Dr. Marty Makary said the CDC’s relentless focus on vaccine-induced immunity and its “demonizing” of those who choose not to get the vaccine make the agency “the most slow, reactionary, political CDC in American history.”
n an ideal nation, the most important duty of an elected politician involves ensuring the protection of their constituents’ individual rights. During COVID Mania, the political forces for tyranny in America have attempted to contaminate this sacred ideal — under the guise of keeping us safe from a virus — by running roughshod over every aspect of our lives.
Big Pharma apparently also funds Coronavirus World Updates which pours out lies to counter the overwhelming evidence that can no longer be suppressed about Covid and the ineffectiveness and danger of the vaccines.
Data from Israel, where the vast majority of the population has been injected with the Pfizer mRNA concoction, show those “vaccinated” against COVID-19 and unvaccinated have the same infection rate, regardless of age.
The director of the Pathological Institute of the University of Heidelberg, Peter Schirmacher, has carried out over forty autopsies on people who had died within two weeks of their vaccination. Schirmacher expressed alarm over his findings.
In an extraordinary interview last week, Dr. Peter McCullough, an American professor of Medicine and Vice Chief of Internal Medicine at Baylor University, declared that the world has been subjected to a form of bioterrorism, and that the suppression of early treatments for COVID-19—such as hydroxychloroquine— “was tightly linked to the development of a vaccine.”
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
You don’t argue with the Tatmadaw – the Myanmar Armed Forces. It’s always their way, or the highway. Since the mid-20th century, the Chinese have come to understand it quite well.
How Beijing approaches the Myanmar maze is conditioned by four variables: natural gas; water; the drug trade; and the fractious clashes between the Tatmadaw and a dizzying patchwork of over 135 ethnic minorities.
Each Myanmar ethnic group exhibits its own peculiar history, culture and language. They control vast territories, whole industries and serious militias. Myanmar’s two-third majority is represented by the Bamar – also known as the Lowland Burmese. The Tatmadaw is largely a Lowland Burmese army – in perennial conflict with that large ethnic jigsaw puzzle.
The ethnic minorities live mostly in the hills and along Myanmar’s porous jungle borders. Myanmar is divided into seven states – named after the seven largest ethnic groups: Kachin, Chin, Karenni, Karen, Mon, Shan and Rakhine. Alliances tend to be quite fragile, but historically the Chinese have been inclined to support a few of them in their fight against the Tatmadaw.
Drug trade in Myanmar is a virtually impenetrable matryoshka – with most of these groups connected across the Golden Triangle to partners in China, Thailand and Laos, and on top of it competing against each other.
The Shan traditionally have used huge profits in the drug trade to buy an array of weapons. There is a wealth of competing Shan groups, among them the army of the late, notoriously flamboyant drug lord Khun Sa, known as “The Opium King of Burma”; the former headhunters that compose the Wa tribe; and a bunch of Kokang Chinese who form the eastern Shan State army.
The opium/heroin business – and much of the ya ba (amphetamine) trafficking – in the Golden Triangle is now largely controlled by the much feared United Wa State Army: a 20,000-strong ultra-hardcore militia, one of the most powerful on the planet, complete with their private collection of surface-to-air missiles.
And that brings us to the Chinese angle – because many of these ethnic potentates, from Khun Sa to Kyi Myint, a.k.a. Zhang Zhiming, a former head of the Communist Party of Burma, have forged very close relations with Chinese Triads.
Yet what does the central government in Myanmar have to do with the heart of the action in the Golden Triangle? Not much. The Tatmadaw may strike the odd peace deal with these unruly actors, but they usually don’t last long.
What the Tatmadaw did over these past decades was a crash course on business – learning the ropes about post-Mao China. That’s how they evolved into a major corporate empire – much more than an army.
Myanmar was already on the front line when sections of the People’s Liberation Army (PL) in China got into business. For instance, Yunnan province in southern China was the operating base for the top three heroin Triad families. So the first step was Burma linked to the Chinese triads as the logistical arm of the Golden Triangle drug trade. The next step featured China building railways to link Yunnan to Burma/Myanmar.
Oil and gas star as the next piece of the puzzle. As France’s Total started to expand their initial oil and gas exploits off Rakhine – formerly known as Arakan state – the Chinese had the foresight to invest in a long oil and gas pipeline linking it to Yunnan. From Beijing’s point of view, what really matters is this Sino-Myanmar oil and gas pipeline from the Bay of Bengal to southern China – with the Tatmadaw in charge of security.
While China invests in copper mines and dams, but arguably its key investment in Myanmar is a new deep-water port on the Bay of Bengal, with the accompanying Kyaukphyu Special Free Trade Zone. The port and the pipeline interconnect, representing the Myanmar backbone of the vitally important Belt and Road Initiative (BRI) Southeast Asia corridor.
And that brings us to the intractable Rohingya problem.
China’s absolute priority is to protect the new port plus the Special Free Trade Zone being built in Rakhine.
For quite a while the Myanmar government’s income – now controlled by the Tatmadaw – has depended on the oil/gas from onshore and offshore operations in Rakhine as well as the rail/road connectivity.
The Chinese for their part are in close touch with the Kachin Army and the Kokang ethnic group. If the going gets tough, the plan is to use them as well as the Arakan Army, active in the region, to manage the Tatmadaw in case they start having funny ideas. The only thing that matters for the Chinese is the BRI corridor and the Rohingya find themselves caught in the middle of this serious power play.
The Myanmar puzzle is made even more complex by the issue of water. The Beijing leadership knows very well how strategic Myanmar is in terms of solving China’s critical water imbalance. China, with 20% of the world’s population, can count on only 7% of the world’s fresh water. And 80% of China’s water is in the south, while over 700 million Chinese and two-thirds of its farmland are in the north.
The solution has been to build 11 of the world’s largest hydroelectric dams on the key rivers which flow towards China’s neighbors. And this has given rise to dramatic problems, especially in the case of the Mekong, where every region below the dams, in Myanmar, Laos, Thailand, Cambodia, and Vietnam, has been extremely handicapped. And the issue is far from over: 11 more dams will be built in the lower Mekong, in Laos and Cambodia.
The relationship between Beijing and the Tatmadaw was never a bed of roses. Overall, the Chinese were seen with much suspicion at the Ministry of Foreign Relations level during the NLD years, while most Tatmadaw Generals admire China’s economic power. Beijing’s immutable diplomatic law amounts to non-interference in the domestic policies of its partners – so it has refrained from weighing in on whether the military coup earlier this year was actually not really a coup, as the Tadmadaw argues.
Facts on the ground spell out the Tatdadaw making a lot of money over the years by collecting fees and owning shares in Chinese deals struck in the ethnic regions. At the same time the Tatmadaw know that the Chinese, even indirectly, provide military support to quite a few militias. And drug kingpins are only able to operate smoothly across the Golden Triangle because the Chinese allow it.
So, the relationship is undoubtedly an uneasy one. A great deal of Chinese influence in Myanmar was somewhat restricted during the NLD government. Now the whole situation is in limbo. Yet Beijing never takes its eyes off the Big Prize: BRI corridor projects should never be in danger, and Myanmar will always be an inextricable part of the New Silk Roads.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
This article was originally published on Inside Over.
Pepe Escobar, born in Brazil, is a correspondent and editor-at-large at Asia Times and columnist for Consortium News and Strategic Culture in Moscow. Since the mid-1980s he’s lived and worked as a foreign correspondent in London, Paris, Milan, Los Angeles, Singapore, Bangkok. He has extensively covered Pakistan, Afghanistan and Central Asia to China, Iran, Iraq and the wider Middle East. Pepe is the author of Globalistan – How the Globalized World is Dissolving into Liquid War; Red Zone Blues: A Snapshot of Baghdad during the Surge. He was contributing editor to The Empire and The Crescent and Tutto in Vendita in Italy. His last two books are Empire of Chaos and 2030. Pepe is also associated with the Paris-based European Academy of Geopolitics. When not on the road he lives between Paris and Bangkok.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Brazil and the US seem to be getting closer once again, after a short period of diplomatic tensions. Recently, US officials expressed their support for Brazil to be promoted to the status of NATO’s global partner. Due to Biden’s criticisms against Bolsonaro (motivated by the environmental crimes committed in the Amazon Forest), the Brazilian government reversed a part of its anti-China narrative in 2021 and allowed Huawei’s participation in the Brazilian 5G market. Now, apparently, the US wants to “regain” Brazil as a regional ally, aiming to prevent China’s advance into South America. Also, with Latin America gradually returning to the center of Washington’s geopolitical interests, Brazil’s role as a US satellite becomes progressively more important, considering Brazil’s strategic value in building an encirclement strategy against Venezuela.
Last week, a committee of American officials traveled to Brazil’s capital, Brasilia, to initiate a series of strategic dialogues with representatives of the Brazilian government. On the occasion, US National Security Adviser Jake Sullivan demonstrated the US support for Brazil to become a global NATO partner. The country’s entry into the Western military alliance’s cooperation program was discussed between Sullivan and Brazilian Defense Minister Walter Braga Netto. Subsequently, Sullivan met with President Bolsonaro himself, reinforcing bilateral diplomacy, offering the proposal and showing his personal support for this measure.
Sullivan imposed only one condition on Brazil: the return of the veto to Huawei. Chinese participation in the Brazilian 5G is considered a frontal threat to American interests as it represents an expansion of the influence of one of Washington’s biggest geopolitical rivals into an extremely strategic territory within the American continent itself. For the US, banishing China from the central and southern subcontinents is crucial to ensuring its regional hegemony – and it is precisely regional hegemony that the US is trying to consolidate by growing NATO’s presence in South America. In this sense, the American adviser’s message was clear: one thing depends on the other – to enter the NATO program, Brazil needs to ban the Chinese company, without a third way.
To avoid conflicts and try to maintain the current 5G market scenario, Brazilian officials tried to negotiate some alternatives, proposing ways to limit the Chinese presence without resorting to a total ban, but Sullivan denied any negotiations in this regard. Later, the American Embassy reaffirmed the adviser’s words and published a note showing that it was very concerned about the national security of countries that allow Huawei to act (maintaining Donald Trump’s narrative on the use of 5G services for espionage by Beijing). The Chinese Embassy in Brasilia vehemently repudiated the American attitude and also published a note, stating that the Americans want to “sabotage the Sino-Brazilian partnership”, in addition to saying that the US is a “hacker empire” and the real threat to global cybersecurity.
Within the Bolsonaro team, there are many different opinions on the topic. In fact, Bolsonaro personally believes in all anti-China narratives and supports the banishment of Huawei, but he had to give up his ideologically motivated plans and think pragmatically in recent months as he no longer had American backing. Now, this backing resurfaces and then the Brazilian president will have to decide between maintaining the status quo or resuming the policy of automatic alignment with Washington. The Brazilian Intelligence Agency is also in favor of the ban because it fears possible threats to national security, but the Armed Forces, on the other hand, are not unanimously in favor of the measure, as they know that it is important for national defense to maintain peaceful relations with the US rivals. With this scenario, the debate is far from over.
Bolsonaro has always tried to guarantee Brazil’s entry into NATO (as a member or partner) and this was one of the main promises of his electoral campaign. Former President Trump himself never promised Brazil a role in the alliance and with Biden the project became even more distant – now, suddenly, it is the Biden government itself that makes the idea come back with much more force, which is not by chance: occupying Brazil is important for the US to be able to curtail Chinese influence on the American continent and, even more, consolidate a strategy of encirclement against Venezuela.
US interest in Brazil emerges as a continuation of recent events in the Americas. The assassination of the Haitian president, the attempted colorful revolution in Cuba and the crisis with foreign ships along the Venezuelan coast are multiple aspects of the American new incursion on its own continent. Washington is trying to neutralize the territories where it disputes influence with China (such as Brazil) and, as a result, suffocate “unrecoverable” governments (such as Venezuela, Cuba, and Nicaragua). “Regaining” Brazil is positive for the Americans in this double sense: reducing Chinese influence and encircling Caracas.
It is more likely that Bolsonaro will accept the proposal, considering that not only he but also the Intelligence Agency, some ministers and many parliamentarians want Brazil’s entry into NATO. But the measure will encounter resistance, as a part of the military has a pure pragmatic view and knows that accepting the proposal means exchanging peaceful relations with major world powers, such as China and Russia, for a subordinate role in the alliance, which seems to favor only the US. In addition, it must be remembered that China is Brazil’s largest trading partner and that Brazilian participation in NATO would represent a real blow to bilateral relations. In this sense, the Brazilian business and agrarian sector will severely oppose the acceptance of the American offer.
Certainly, there will be even more polarization in the Brazilian scenario in the coming months.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Lucas Leiroz is a research fellow in international law at the Federal University of Rio de Janeiro.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Over the centuries pandemics have come and gone. Some were real like the Bubonic plague of the 14th Century and some, like AIDS, were fake. But there is one pandemic that has always been with us. It never goes away and outbreaks can occur anywhere at any time. Sometimes it’s a small outbreak and sometimes it’s huge and global, such as WWII and now COVID-19. It hangs over the human race like a rotten rag soaked with blood, and death, and corruption.
The pandemic I’m talking about is tyranny—the need to have power over others—to strip others of all they own including their dignity. In the case of COVID-19, with gene altering vaccines, they even want to strip us of what it means to be human.
The overwhelming majority of the human race isn’t interested in tyranny. Only a tiny minority of corrupt and greedy psychopaths want to rule with an iron fist. In my opinion they are like malignant cancer cells.
There are about 30 trillion cells in the human body. For whatever reason some cells go haywire and turn against the rest of the body—they become cancerous. Instead of helping the body these trouble making disruptive cells seek to interfere with its normal functions and destroy it. In too many cases they succeed.
Just as cancer cells can corrupt and make other cells malignant, power-hungry psychopaths are often charismatic and can turn a percentage of the population into their minions of flying monkeys who will carry out their agenda and destroy a free and peaceful society. That’s the biggest problem of all: there is always a percentage of the population who are willing to carry out their orders.
Government power is a two-edged sword. It can be used to do good or evil.
Political scientist Rudolph Rummel (1932-2014) coined the term “democide” which he defined as murder by government. After studying over 8,000 reports of government-caused deaths, Rummel estimated that 262 million people were victims of government murder in the 20th Century alone—six times the number of people who died in battle. Personally, I would include soldiers who died in unnecessary wars which would make it a lot more than 262 million.
One of Professor Rummel’s main findings was that political mass murder is much more common under authoritarian regimes. But where power is diffuse, checked, and balanced, political violence is rare. In other words, the more power government has the more dangerous it becomes. This is why preserving freedom is so vital because as Rummel stated: “concentrated political power is the most dangerous thing on earth.”
The big bamboozle
How do governments get the masses to go along with tyranny?
Consider the words of our second U.S. President, John Adams (1735-1826):
“Be not intimidated, therefore, by any terrors, from publishing with the utmost freedom…nor suffer yourselves to be wheedled out of your liberty by any pretences of politeness, delicacy, or decency. These, as they are often used, are but three different names for hypocrisy, chicanery, and cowardice.”
There be monsters here
The most common form of chicanery that governments use to wheedle people out of their liberty are moral panics. The red thread that runs through all of them is that some danger/evil lurks everywhere and must be stamped out. Due process of law and other Constitutional rights just get in the way and must be swept aside.
All moral panics are ploys to scare us into giving up our freedom.
Even if it’s Just plain folks that unintentionally start a moral panic, governments will be quick to jump on the bandwagon to acquire more power and revenue. They will use propaganda to manipulate you into being so anxious to save yourself that you will be willing to give up everything you believe in—to sell your soul to the devil.
Moral panics, crusades, witch hunts, mass hysteria, call them whatever you like, can take many forms. They can occur on the authoritarian left or right. Prohibition, McCarthyism, Women Against Pornography, the War on Drugs, the Christian Right, Mothers Against Drunk Driving (MADD), the War on Terror, Me Too, QAnon,Satanic Panic, (the belief that children in daycare centers were being molested and forced to participate in satanic rituals during the 1980s and 1990s along with many other outlandish notions), Blue Lives Matter, the Victims Rights Movement, are but a few examples of misguided crusades.
Don’t misunderstand me. I’m not saying that some of the things that the aforementioned crusade against aren’t real problems. My point is that moral panics of this nature distort real problems by blowing them way out of proportion which in the end winds up making them a lot worse as well as causing additional problems.
Bottom line: Don’t confuse revenge with justice. Don’t be conned into throwing away your freedom in the name of stopping the bad guys and the evil doers. Because, if you do, all of us will be victims—women as well as men.
It’s your duty
The core belief of all moral panics is Communitarianism, the belief that the collective society is more important than the individual, that you have to give up your natural inalienable rights for some greater good or higher purpose. This nonsensical propaganda has been used by every two-bit dictator from time immemorial.
In some primitive cultures this kind of stupid thinking resulted in human sacrifice, such as allowing a religious nut who calls himself a high priest to cut someone’s heart out on a sacrificial altar or throw children off a cliff in order to make sure that the Sun will continue to rise, or that the crops will grow.
It is true that we are part of a collective society, but only in limited ways. Yes, we are obligated to pay taxes because there are things that we can’t do on our own. We have an interdependence on each other. We need each other. For example, it takes the efforts of a complex technological collective society to build and maintain our modern infrastructure and make sure our air, water, and food are safe. All of these things are what governments do best. But that’s as far as it goes.
First and foremost, we are free, sovereign individuals. What we wear, what we think, what we read see, and hear, where we choose to go, what makes us happy, and what we choose or not choose to put into our bodies, which includes individual health choices, are no one’s business but our own.
Communities don’t have rights only the individuals who live in them have rights. There is no such thing as “community standards” because we all have different standards. To be free only as long as you conform is no freedom at all—it is replacing real freedom with pseudo liberty.
The COVID con job
In the case of COVID-19, the newest mantra is that the unvaccinated are spreading COVID-19 and forcing governments to impose more lockdowns, mask mandates, etc. Don’t fall for it. There is no pandemic. There is no emergency. There was no excess mortality in 2020.
What’s really going on is that they have to keep the fear porn going in order to install the Chinese social credit system via vaccine passports and create a totalitarian world government. None of this oppression is about a virus.
Think about it. If the COVID vaccines are “safe and effective” as they claim, why are huge percentages of doctors, nurses, and other health care workers refusing to get them? Why is a huge percentage of the public refusing to get them? Could it be because so many have already died and become permanently disabled—nearly 25,000 in the U.S. alone as of July 23, 2021 according to VAERS (Vaccine Adverse Events Reporting System). And according to a study conducted from 2007-2010, that number is many, many times times higher because the VAERS system is grossly inefficient.
And If the vaccines work why worry about the unvaccinated if you’re vaccinated? Why even have a vaccine for a virus with an over 99% survival rate for people under 70 and that numerous studies, like the recent CDC study in Cape Cod Massachusetts, show won’t protect vaccinated people from COVID-19? What is the point in getting a vaccine that doesn’t vaccinate you?
If COVID-19 was a real pandemic and the vaccines really worked, governments and their corporate masters wouldn’t need to bully and coerce people into taking them via mandates like the one just passed in New York City that will prohibit unvaccinated people from fully participating in society.
See this medical apartheid for what it really is: Jim Crow in a white lab coat. Pardon me while I barf.
How we got into this mess
In the 1980s former U.S. President Ronald Reagan (1911-2004) changed the Zeitgeist of our country from being focused on building a strong and prosperous middle class to creating an oligarchy on steroids via massive tax cuts for the wealthy along with deregulation of corporations and banks.
Reagan’s policies, known as Reaganomics, eventually also embraced by the Democratic Party, changed our nation and ultimately the Western world from liberal to neoliberal. It is what allowed people like Bill Gates, and Warren Buffet to become obscenely wealthy. 40 years of Reaganomics is why we are in this COVID quagmire.
The very rich are not like the rest of us. Put money into the pockets of the poor and middle class and they put it back into the economy. This is what drives an economy: demand. People having money in their pockets to buy things. Give money to the very rich and they suck all the wealth out of society because they can only buy so much of anything—there aren’t enough of them. Instead, they either hoard their wealth, gamble with it in the stock market, which can create global poverty and instability, or use it to bribe politicians and corrupt governments.
This is why The World Health Organization has degenerated into The World Vaccine Organization. This is why the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention has become the Centers for Dictatorship Control and Propaganda.
This why it is power and not people that needs to be controlled.
Creating real monsters
When you take ordinary people and allow them to become multibillionaires you create monsters. Meek Dr. Jekylls are turned into Mr Hydes. Monsters from the Freudian ID are freed to wreck havoc upon the world. Not with a potion or an alien technology, but with the power that vast amounts of money can bring. The kind of power to do things that the rest of us wouldn’t dare to do. But they’ll dare because they don’t need to care. They rule and are free to mold the world into their own misshapen and perverted image.
Today’s mega billionaires are kings, queens, princes, and princesses with the mentality of a petulant spoiled child. They think that they can take what they want. They think that there is nothing we can do to stop them. They are wrong.
What must be done
If we don’t change the current system which is global and utterly corrupt then the same problems will continue. So, first and foremost, All billionaires must go—strip them of their wealth. The most money a wealthy person should have is around maybe 30-50 million dollars.
Abolish Big Pharma and all other mega corporations. Keep businesses small to medium sized. And never let any business lobby the government or give politicians money. All elections should be publicly financed. No donations from anyone—especially the rich.
Abolish all standing armies including the police. Without them, governments could not oppress us. The main purpose of police and other military forces has always been to serve the ruling elite—not the people. COVID-19 should have made this abundantly clear. Better to have a citizen police force where its members serve for a month and then rotate back into the civilian population. They should be answerable to and work directly for local communities and not local, state, or national governments. In other words, a militia instead of professional soldiers.
For protection of the nation from foreign enemies a navy and an air force are more than adequate.
Abolish MSEHPA (Model State Emergency Health Powers Act). After 911, the CDC along with a couple of other medical institutions lobbied state governments, and succeeded, in getting them to pass versions of this draconian legislation that gave sweeping powers to Governors and public health departments if medical emergencies are declared. MSEHPA laws abridge every right enumerated in the U.S. Constitution as well as the great principles of liberty enumerated in the Declaration of Independence. All of the vile acts that governments have inflicted on us under the banner of fighting COVID-19 are mainly due to this horrible legislation.
Don’t consolidate government power. Keep its different functions separate. Don’t fall for the efficiency argument. Keep government fragmented and you keep your freedom.
To the brainwashed and still asleep
Be warned people. Continue to hold on to this false belief called COVID-19, do nothing to educate yourselves to the truth, do nothing to fight this evil, and you condemn all of us to a life of slavery. The flame of liberty will be extinguished and our humanity will perish.
Never trust any government or institution with power—it is foolhardy and dangerous. Politicians and those in high-level positions, like all humans, can be ignorant, reactionary, intellectually lazy, illogical, and irresponsible. The less power they have the better so keep them on a very short leash.
And be ever vigilant—especially when those in power tell you that oppressive measures are for your protection and to save lives because as the old saying goes:
The road to hell is paved with good intentions.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Within 9 seconds one hundred thousand people were killed or doomed…
And that’s what is on the drawing board of the Pentagon on a much larger scale, with a trillion dollar nuclear weapons program.
And they say that nuclear weapons are “harmless to the surrounding civilian population”.
And the mainstream media will tell you that nuclear weapons are “peacemaking” bombs to be used against the enemies of America.
I have a dream, we have a dream: criminalize war, abolish nuclear weapons, unseat the war criminals in high office, restore “sanity” in US foreign policy…
Rise up against the dangers of nuclear war.
Spread the word far and wide. View Jules Glimcher’s video below.
Michel Chossudovsky, Remembering Hiroshima August 6, Nagasaki August 9, 2021
*
Sumner Jules Glimcher’s Video:
Published on Apr 23, 2014
This sequence from “Hiroshima-Nagasaki: August 1944,” by filmmaker Sumner Jules Glimcher, is featured in his new ebook, “How To Make A Movie: A Few Secrets.”
This book is meant to be a primer for all, from the first time filmmaker to the advanced professional. The concept is to teach by example. I have made some three-dozen films in every genre imaginable, which have won dozens of awards.
For this book, my plan was to write some twenty chapters, each about a specific work, and then describe one unique aspect of that film. After writing about that aspect (music, montage, aerial photography, narration, etc.)
I then embedded an excerpt from that film (or in two cases the entire film) so that the reader may click on the image on his/her iPAD, and watch how that situation was resolved.
Presumably reading of the problem and then seeing its resolution might inspire readers how to find their own solutions in the work I have spent about one third of my career, some twenty years, in teaching at Harvard, my alma mater, Columbia University for ten years, and NYU for eight, where I was the Director of the “Department of Film, Video and Broadcasting” at NYU’s School of Continuing Education.
At the latter position, I was largely responsible for creating the finest film program on the East Coast. With this background, I believed I have developed some insights in the learning process. When students ask, “What is the most important rule to follow in making a film,” I answer, “Enjoy every minute of what you are doing.”
“How To Make A Movie: A Few Secrets” is now available for download on your iPad, Kindle, Nook and all e-readers, as well as print, which you can purchase from Amazon.
Sumner Jules Glimcher is a World War II veteran, professor, author and filmmaker.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
This book presents a history which is nearing its nadir, where a species of warlike primates is destroying the delicate web of life perceived by Charles Darwin in The Origin of Species, committing a war against nature and the fastest mass extinction in the history of of Earth since 65 million years ago, with global temperatures incinerating the biosphere by several degrees Celsius, within a lifetime. Despite of this knowledge, Homo “sapiens” is proceeding to transfer every accessible molecule of carbon from the Earth crust to the atmosphere and hydrosphere, an auto-da-fe ensues of the terrestrial biosphere. As amplifying feedbacks to global warming—including fires, methane release, ice melt, and warming oceans—are intensifying, at a pace exceeding any recorded in the geological past, societies are pouring their remaining resources into wars. These include likely nuclear wars triggered by arsenals many thousands of missiles strong, posing an equal threat to human existence and that of many other species. Humans, having mastered fire, which allowed them to survive the extreme ice ages, have emerged in the current interglacial as major civilizations coupled with major bloodsheds, called “war”, engulfing multitudes of innocent yet betrayed humans. Long suffering from illusions of omnipotence and omniscience, paranoid fears, a warlike mindset, aggression toward the animals and disrespect of females, coupled with artistic excellence and technical brilliance, humans have become victims of a tragic conflict between the mind and the heart, with fatal consequences.
The Fatal Species: From Warlike Primates to Planetary Mass Extinction
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Cases of Bell’s Palsy have been reported in a number of people in Canada and internationally.
So far in Canada, “there has been a total of 206 reports of Bell’s Palsy following a Pfizer vaccination,” the health agency told Global News in an email Friday.
Symptoms after vaccination may include temporary weakness or paralysis on one side of the face, according to an advisory issued by the department.
Other symptoms include, “uncoordinated movement of the muscles that control facial expression; loss of feeling in the face; headache; tearing from the eye; drooling; lost sense of taste on the front two-thirds of the tongue; hypersensitivity to sound in one ear; or inability to close an eye on one side of the face,” according to the advisory.
Health Canada has received 2,849 reports of serious adverse events, including heart inflammation, allergic reactions, blood clots and strokes.
The Moderna COVID-19 vaccine label already comes with information about reported cases of Bell’s Palsy, and Health Canada “is continuing to assess this issue for all authorized COVID-19 vaccines” currently in use in the country, the release clarified. “The Department will take further action if necessary.”
Health Canada advises people who feel the symptoms of Bell’s Palsy to seek medical attention.
Pfizer vaccine is linked to more deaths in Israel than AstraZeneca’s in the whole of Europe. The findings are catastrophic on every possible level. This is a detailed report that highlights the most devastating findings.
Myocarditis is a heart condition that leads to the inflammation of the heart muscles. The inflammation is a result of the body’s immune response to a certain infection, which leads to weakening and swelling of the heart.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
In an interview with U.S. News & World Report, Dr. Marty Makary said the CDC’s relentless focus on vaccine-induced immunity and its “demonizing” of those who choose not to get the vaccine make the agency “the most slow, reactionary, political CDC in American history.”
Dr. Marty Makary, a professor at Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine and editor-in chief of MedPage Today, is pushing back against the growing drumbeat for mass vaccinations and COVID vaccine mandates.
In an interview with U.S. New & World Reports, Makary said mandating vaccines for “every living, walking American” is not well-supported by science. Makary also expressed concerns about the two-dose vaccine regimen for adolescents.
Makary told U.S. News & World Report that as a physician, he believes “you win more bees with honey than with fire — referring to patients who don’t follow what “we ask them to do.”
Makary believes people “who choose not to get vaccinated are making a poor health decision at their own individual risk.” But he doesn’t believe the unvaccinated pose a public health threat to those who are already immune to the virus.
Makary said:
“Would we be so stern toward people making similar or worse health choices to smoke, drink alcohol or not wear a helmet when riding a bike? Over 85,000 Americans die annually from alcohol, yet we don’t have the same public health fervor or requirements to save those lives. Let’s encourage vaccination rather than activate the personal liberty culture wars that result in people becoming more entrenched in their opposition.”
Makary said that vaccinating everyone — including eventually every newborn — in order to control the pandemic is based on the false assumption that the risk of dying from COVID is equally distributed among the population — but it’s not, he said.
“We have always known that it’s very hard for the virus to hurt someone who is young and healthy,” Makary said. “And that’s still the case.”
Makary suggested taking a similar approach to what is used with the flu shot, which is often mandated for healthcare workers. Makary said while vaccine requirements for healthcare workers make sense, we would never extend those requirements outside of healthcare.
“We’d simply state to the public: Those who avoid the flu shot do so at their own risk,” Makary said.
No scientific support for requiring the vaccine for those with natural immunity
Makary said there is no scientific support for requiring the vaccine in people who have natural immunity — that is, immunity from prior COVID infection. There is zero clinical outcome data to support arguing dogmatically that natural immune individuals “must get vaccinated.”
Makary explained:
“During every month of this pandemic, I’ve had debates with other public researchers about the effectiveness and durability of natural immunity. I’ve been told that natural immunity could fall off a cliff, rendering people susceptible to infection. But here we are now, over a year and a half into the clinical experience of observing patients who were infected, and natural immunity is effective and going strong. And that’s because with natural immunity, the body develops antibodies to the entire surface of the virus, not just a spike protein constructed from a vaccine.”
A recent Israeli study affirmed the superiority of natural immunity. Health Ministry data on the wave of COVID outbreaks which began in May 2021, found a 6.72 times greater level of protection among those with natural immunity compared to those with vaccinated immunity.
In June, a Cleveland Clinic study found vaccinating people with natural immunity did not add to their level of protection.
The clinic studied 52,238 employees. Of those, 49,659 never had the virus and 2,579 had COVID and recovered. Of the 2,579 who previously were infected, 1,359 remained unvaccinated, compared with 22,777 who were vaccinated.
Not one of the 1,359 previously infected subjects who remained unvaccinated had a SARS-CoV-2 infection over the duration of the study.
As The Defender reported, a December 2020 study by Singapore researchers found neutralizing antibodies (one prong of the immune response) remained present in high concentrations for 17 years or more in individuals who recovered from the original SARS-CoV.
In March 2020, the NIH’s Dr. Anthony Fauci shared his view (in an email [p. 22] to Ezekiel Emanuel) that “their [sic] would be substantial immunity post infection.”
— Robert F. Kennedy Jr (@RobertKennedyJr) June 8, 2021
Yet despite these recent findings, health authorities are largely ignoring the scientific evidence of natural immunity’s stellar track record. In fact, as the American Institute of Economic Research reported, it appears in order to promote the COVID vaccine agenda, key organizations are not only “downplaying” natural immunity but may be seeking to “erase” it altogether.
Makary said instead of talking about the vaccinated and the unvaccinated, we should be talking about the immune and non-immune.
“Immunity can be proven with a simple antibody test,” Makary said, and “vaccine passports and proof-of-vaccine documents should recognize it.”
Makary said there’s very strong population immunity in most parts of the U.S. and these areas are resistant to the delta variant. Roughly a third to half of Americans who are unvaccinated have natural immunity, based on an analysis of California residents.
According to a study conducted by the state of California in March, 38% of Californians and 45% of Los Angeles residents had natural immunity.
“We’re potentially talking about a large portion of the U.S. population who may be immune to COVID and not know it,” Makary said. “They should be tested to find out, and we should concentrate our vaccination efforts on people who are not immune.”
No strong case for vaccinating kids, Makary says
When it comes to vaccinating healthy kids, Makary says there is not a strong case for vaccinating young people up to age 25.
Makary explained:
“When it comes to vaccinating healthy kids — and you could argue young people up to 25 — there is a case for vaccination but it’s not strong. The COVID-19 death risk is clustered among kids with a comorbid condition, like obesity.
“Of the more than 330 COVID-19 deaths in kids under age 25, there’s good preliminary data suggesting that most or nearly all appear to be in kids with a pre-existing condition. For kids with concurrent medical conditions, the case for vaccination is compelling. But for healthy kids?”
Makary said he’s concerned the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) hasn’t considered whether one- or two-dose shots would be sufficient or safer for young people.
“The agency’s Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices has vigorously recommended the two-dose vaccine regimen for all children ages 12 and up, regardless of whether kids already have immunity. I take issue with that,” Makary said.
Makary said the data CDC based its recommendation on — the Vaccine Adverse Events Reporting System (VAERS) — is incomplete at best because it isn’t fact-checked by authorities and may not be fully capturing the extent of vaccine complications from the second dose in young people.
As The Defender reported, Simone Scott, 19, and Jacob Clynick, 13, died shortly after receiving their second COVID vaccine doses after developing heart inflammation.
Simone Scott underwent a heart transplant one month after developing what her doctors believe was myocarditis following her second dose of Moderna. She received the second vaccine May 1 and died June 11.
— Robert F. Kennedy Jr (@RobertKennedyJr) June 15, 2021
Makary said he wished the CDC would tell the public more about their deaths, and the 19 others youths under the age of 25 who, according to CDC data, have died after receiving a COVID vaccine.
“Since the clinical trials were not powered sufficiently to detect rare events like these, I want to know more about those deaths before making blanket recommendations,” Makary said.
He added:
“Researching these events is important when issuing broad guidance about vaccinating healthy kids, including students, who already have an infinitesimally small risk of dying from COVID-19.”
Makary perplexed by vitriol directed at those reluctant to get vaccinated
Makary believes that for some, the U.S. Food and Drug Administration is the biggest driver of hesitancy in those not willing to get vaccinated as the agency has failed to fully approve COVID vaccines due to stability testing.
Makary didn’t refrain from attacking the CDC either. According to Makary, the CDC’s relentless focus on vaccine-induced immunity and its “demonizing” of individuals who choose not to get a COVID vaccine make the agency “the most slow, reactionary, political CDC in American history.”
In June, Makary blasted the CDC and White House for continuing to push COVID vaccines when it’s not necessary.
“I never thought I’d say this, but please ignore the CDC guidance,” he said.
“The goal of our pandemic response should be to reduce death, illness and disability, but instead what you’re seeing is a movement that has morphed from being pro-vaccine to vaccine fanaticism at all costs.”
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Megan Redshaw is a freelance reporter for The Defender. She has a background in political science, a law degree and extensive training in natural health.
Featured image: Martin Adel “Marty” Makary is an American surgeon, professor and author. (Source: CHD)
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
In an ideal nation, the most important duty of an elected politician involves ensuring the protection of their constituents’ individual rights. During COVID Mania, the political forces for tyranny in America have attempted to contaminate this sacred ideal — under the guise of keeping us safe from a virus — by running roughshod over every aspect of our lives. The Biden Administration has sought to delegitimize the former category of politician, whose most high-profile advocate in America today is Gov. Ron DeSantis, in order to boost the latter form of nanny state authoritarianism.
On Tuesday, the battle between these two forces continued, with high profile Biden Administration actors (such as President Biden himself, along with White House spokesperson Jen Psaki) demanding that Gov. DeSantis “get out of the way” and let the ruling class, under the advice of their esteemed “public health experts,” continue to trample our rights as Americans.
“We need leadership from everyone. If some governors aren’t willing to do the right thing to beat this pandemic, then they should allow businesses and universities who want to do the right thing to be able to do it,” Joe Biden said today at a press conference. “I say to these governors, ‘Please help. But if you aren’t going to help, at least get out of the way.'”
Pres. Biden: "If some governors aren't willing to do the right thing to beat this pandemic, then they should allow businesses and universities who want to do the right thing to be able to do it."
The language is purposely colorless and unspecific. What they want and support is very clear, as stated mid day by Psaki. The Biden Administration and the forces for COVID tyranny want the governor to let the federal government, school boards, and “pubic health” bureaucrats impose discriminatory movement passes on populations based on their COVID vaccination status. Additionally, they want to let school boards and teachers unions force children to wear masks all day, subjecting them to physical and emotional trauma, so that their elders can feel safer.
Governor DeSantis: "Many Florida schoolchildren have suffered under forced masking policies, and it is prudent to protect the ability of parents to make decisions regarding the wearing of masks by their children."
As political season heats up, the Biden Administration has stepped up its campaign to attack Governor DeSantis, largely in bad faith.
COVID cases are indeed up in Florida. This is expected, because just like at this time last year, Florida is dealing with yet another respiratory illness season. The Biden Administration claims that forced masking, vaccine passports, lockdowns, and the like will somehow improve Florida’s situation, and that the sick would suddenly stop getting sick during the hot summer months.
There is simply no evidence anywhere in the world that restricting the individual rights of citizens, segregating the unvaccinated from the vaccinated, and forcing people to wear masks all day would have any benefit whatsoever when it comes to stopping a virus. Virtually every “public health” command and edict has come up empty, and these severely damaging policies have made matters worse across the board. The forces for COVID tyranny live in an evidence-free world, and DeSantis is right to dismiss them and shame them for their failures. The data and the science is on the side of the Florida governor, and not America’s COVID totalitarian class. And even if those tyrannical solutions worked to stop a virus with a 99.8% recovery rate, the residual effects would not be anywhere near worth it under any rational cost benefit analysis.
Luckily for Floridians, when it comes to protecting the most vulnerable Americans among us, the schoolchildren who remain without a political voice, the Florida governor has made it his mission to “get in the way,” in the form of protecting their individual rights from the “public health” extremists.
“There will be no lockdowns, there will be no school closures, there will be no restrictions and no mandates in the state of Florida.”@GovRonDeSantis issued an executive order to block any #MaskMandates in #Florida schools. https://t.co/5YYRxTNoDe
The Iraq War vet is clearly no pushover, and he’s had enough of the corporate press and other corrupt institutions blaming the supposedly non-compliant class for a virus problem that they couldn’t solve through shoddy authoritarian nonsense.
Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis on mask judginess:
"I'm sick of the judgemental stuff … Nobody's trying to get ill here. There's people that were hermits for a year & a half that wore six masks & still contracted it … Let's not indulge these things that somehow it's their fault." pic.twitter.com/PA0mnrGg6a
By being the man who “gets in the way” when the forces of tyranny come for his state, DeSantis is upholding his commitment to the individual rights of each and every citizen of Florida, and he’s setting a foundational American example for all elected politicians to follow.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Featured image is from The Ron Paul Institute for Peace and Prosperity
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
If you don’t think vaccines are one of the great achievements of Western Civilization, just take a walk through a 19th-century cemetery and witness the reality of the human condition before them. However, the COVID vaccine is not a traditional vaccine. It is, instead, a huge experiment that can have major negative consequences and that our institutions are nevertheless trying to make mandatory.
In the pre-ethicist days of 1796, Edwin Jenner inoculated 8-year-old James Phipps with cowpox on his hunch that milkmaids seldom suffered the scourge of smallpox that had plagued man since antiquity. Later he inoculated the boy with actual smallpox, and his hunch was vindicated. From then on, vaccinations have been a godsend, although not without some notable exceptions including the Cutter Incident, where 200,000 children received the live poliovirus. Unfortunately, the new mRNA vaccines may prove another notable exception.
It’s not that mRNA vaccines are inherently bad. They’re not. In fact, they are an extraordinary achievement in molecular biology. However, if not for mass censorship, it would be stunningly clear that the COVID vaccines have been causing an unacceptable level of adverse reactions, especially for a virus with a death rate of only .5%.
There’s a reason why new vaccine approval usually takes a decade or more. The immune system is complicated, highly variable between individuals, and in delicate balance. Immunocompromised individuals can succumb to any microbe, but equally devastating is an overactive immune system that can cause autoimmune diseases, including deadly Guillain-Barré Syndrome which the FDA just quietly posted to their website is associated with the Janssen vaccine. It should be no surprise that vaccines can engender adverse reactions as they alter that delicate balance by design.
That’s why rigorous testing is essential for any vaccine, and even then, every individual must weigh the risks versus benefits, just as they would for any approved medical treatment. But the COVID vaccines are not approved, and there are specific laws governing unapproved vaccines, requiring:
The argument that the law sanctions mandated “consequences” for refusal is meritless. An option to refuse is no such option if the “consequence” requires the sacrifice of your firstborn. Whenever a statute has seemingly conflicting language, courts are required to “interpret in a way that makes them compatible, not contradictory.” Here, the “consequences” must be read to be the medical “consequences” from not taking the experimental treatment, not arbitrary “consequences” that public or private actors impose that undermine your right to refuse.
What’s worse is that these vaccines are not just experimental; mRNA vaccines are a radical departure from traditional vaccines. Any vaccine rushed to market with Emergency Use Authorization would be called experimental; the COVID vaccines truly need a more alarming designation, say, “super” experimental?
The mechanisms of an ordinary vaccine are relatively simple. A virus is attenuated so it can no longer cause disease but your immune system still mounts a response. Upon injection, the body’s professional antigen-presenting cells (APCs) engulf the attenuated virus, chew it up, and present fragments (antigens) on the MHCII-complex on the cell membrane. No ordinary tissue is involved, just the APCs. When your body’s helper T-cells recognize the antigen, a complex cascade of immune interactions activates B-cells to make neutralizing antibodies highly specific to the antigen. Some of both the B and T-cells convert to memory cells, so the next time the same virus is encountered, the response can be much stronger and quicker.
In contrast, there is nothing simple about the “super” experimental mRNA vaccines. Instead of an attenuated virus, the new vaccines wrap mRNA-1273 (a modified version of the virus’s own genetic instructions for manufacturing spike protein, the protein responsible for viral entry into the cell) with phospholipids, which self-assemble into a nanoparticle (mRNA-LNP) with the ability to enter the cell. Importantly, the mRNA-LNP is designed to preferentially target APCs. Once inside, the mRNA uses the cells’ own machinery to manufacture spike protein. The APC chews up the spike protein and presents it just like before. What could go wrong?
Targeting mRNA-LNP to APCs is in its infancy. Most of the testing has been done in vitro, but studies have found little correlation with in vivo results. An in vivo study showed this targeting to be only 66% effective, so a full third of the mRNA-LNP is winding up in ordinary tissue. The consequences are very significant as the immune response in an ordinary cell is completely different from an APC.
When an ordinary cell is infected, it similarly translates the mRNA into spike protein, chops it up, but displays it on the MHCI-complex. MHCI, unlike MHCII, binds and activates cytotoxic T-cells (TC) which release chemicals to destroy the cell. Additionally, the antigen on the MHCI binds to antibodies, circulating after the first shot, which triggers the complement system to destabilize the cell membrane until osmotic pressure causes it to burst. The result is thousands of spike proteins manufactured inside spill out free to invade other cells. Once inside, the cell will do the same, chop it up, present it, and await TC and complement-induced death — more tissue damage.
Studies have shown that the spike protein itself has neurotoxic effects outside of the cell as well as causing clotting in the bloodstream. Using the spike protein for the antigen is what one researcher calls the “big mistake.” There is evidence the spike protein not only crosses the blood-brain barrier but is also preferentially absorbed by ACE2 expressive tissue including the heart, kidneys, ovaries, and arteries.
In a traditional vaccine, the dose is the dose but, here, the dose is dependent on highly variable cellular uptake of the mRNA-LNP, translation mechanisms from mRNA to protein, and the lifetime of the mRNA-LNP. Ordinary mRNA has a half-life of only a few minutes in the cell, and in that time the mRNA can make 10 to 100 spike proteins. But mRNA-1273 has been significantly modified to persist in the body 8-10 hours and have a 10-fold increase in translatability. Depending upon the individual, the dose of manufactured spike protein can be enormous.
It should be no wonder CDC’s VAERS site reports over 1000 cases of myocarditis, 600 miscarriages, 15,000 allergic reactions, and 5,000 deaths. What is a wonder is why the government is illegally colluding with Big Tech to suppress any word of this from getting out.
These problems are not insurmountable and will no doubt be improved. A change as simple as modifying the mRNA to express only a portion of the spike protein could dramatically reduce adverse reactions. Yet, even now, for older age groups where the disease is far more lethal, they still offer benefits that can outweigh the risks.
However, for healthy children and young adults, as well as the COVID recovered, where there is nearly no risk of death and only a minuscule chance of hospitalization, promoting these “super” experimental and potentially deadly vaccines in their current form is profoundly ill-advised.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
The Covid Deception is the worst criminal act in human history.
Recently I pointed out that Big Pharma runs an Internet operation to muster Democrats to the defense of Tony Fauci, who has been caught in a number of lies and would face indictment if the US had a rule of law. Big Pharma apparently also funds Coronavirus World Updates which pours out lies to counter the overwhelming evidence that can no longer be suppressed about Covid and the ineffectiveness and danger of the vaccines.
From all over the world the evidence is conclusive that the countries with the largest percentage of the population vaccinated are experiencing the largest number of new Covid cases called “breakthroughs,” a deceptive term to keep focus off the fact that it is the vaccines that are likely causing the new illnesses, not a “delta variant.”
Some parts of the world such as Iceland and Gibraltar have between 90% and 100% of their populations vaccinated, yet they are experiencing high numbers of new illnesses. In other parts of the world reports are coming in that 75% of new infections are among the fully vaccinated. US public health officials are saying the fully vaccinated need to wear masks, an admission that the vaccines provide no protection (neither do the masks). Others health officials report that the vaccines are only good for 6 months and boosters are necessary. But if it is the vaccines that are causing the “breakthroughs,” the booster jabs will just cause more illnesses.
It is inexplicable that health officials cannot get the narrative in line with the facts.
The latest lie from Coronavirus World Updates is that “those who are not vaccinated are more than twice as likely to be reinfected.” There is no evidence whatsoever for this statement. Indeed, the evidence completely contradicts the statement. Country after country report that the “breakthroughs” are concentrated in the vaccinated. People who had Covid and recovered have natural immunity which holds up far better than the six months being ascribed to the vaccines.
The number of official Covid cases is the product of a defective Covid test, now being abandoned by the CDC and WHO. The test was run at such high cycles that it produced false positives that were used to exaggerate the threat and induce fear to prepare acceptance of inoculation. The actual Covid cases are a small percentage of the official number. Remember also that last flu season there were no flu cases reported. The flu cases were counted as Covid cases.
The Covid deaths were also greatly exaggerated. Hospitals had financial incentives to report all deaths as Covid deaths. Most “Covid deaths” were due to co-morbidities, lack of treatment, and even to a motorcycle accident.
Here is how to understand that Covid is being used to make vaccine makers and their investors very rich. Covid is amongst us. It has now allegedly produced the “delta variant” and many more variants are to come. The vaccine only works for a limited time. To be safe we will need booster shots. As the “variants” will continue forever, so will the booster shots.
There might be darker agendas afoot. There is evidence that the toxic spike protein in the vaccine accumulates in the ovaries and testicles, thus impairing human fertility. We have reached the point in our collapse that evidence itself is now regarded as “conspiracy theory” and is “fact-checked” away by the hired guns of the corrupt American establishment.
According to the corrupt American medical establishment which values money over life, doctors, such as Tess Lawrie, who tell the truth and cure you of Covid are “spreading misinformation”
Here is Dr. Tess Lawrie of the Evidence-Based Medicine Consultancy:
WHILE some well-intentioned (but ill-informed) MPs are doing their utmost to counter Covid ‘vaccine hesitancy’ in their constituencies, the remarkable Dr Tess Lawrie is continuing to try to persuade medical colleagues to pause the rollout.
She sets out her case simply and powerfully in this interview with Mark Dolan of talkRADIO, aired on Wednesday. Well worth watching, and it could be sent to friends and relatives who are wondering who to believe on the issue.
Dolan, who has had both doses of the vaccine himself, puts questions reflecting the perspective held by most people, that the vaccine is safe and effective, as repeatedly advertised by the NHS.
Lawrie, who founded the Evidence-Based Medicine Consultancy Ltd, a specialist firm committed to improving the quality of healthcare through rigorous research, shows a cool authority in her replies.
‘I’ve looked at the data and I think there is reason to pause,’ she says. By the end of June, 300,000 people had reported adverse events through the UK regulator’s Yellow Card system after taking the vaccine, and this is not normal.
‘If you take a vaccine like tetanus, around since 1968, there are 36 deaths attributed to it on the World Health Organisation (WHO) database, whereas six to seven thousand deaths have been reported from Covid vaccine in just a few months.
‘In the UK, there are 1,440 deaths. So this is unprecedented in the history of any medicine, to have so many deaths reported in such a short time [four months], and indeed so many reports in such a short time.’
Pressed by Dolan on whether this meant the need for a pause, even though the reports do not prove cause and effect, she says: ‘I tend to adopt the precautionary principle. I think if there’s any cause for concern, especially in view of these alarming numbers of reports, we need to get more information, and follow up each and every report to find out a bit more about its association – indeed, is it a cause for concern.
‘I feel there is a lack of transparency from the regulatory bodies. In their report, they highlight a very rare brain clot, cerebral venous sinus thrombosis, and that there have been 30 deaths associated with this and a couple of hundred cases.
‘But when you look at the Yellow Card data, you find there have been 2,208 strokes reported – a brain bleed – and of those, 154 people died. These data are far more worrying to me than just the cerebral venous sinus thrombosis data.
‘And when you look at all sorts of bleed, and the causes of death overall, you see that many are associated with bleeding and clotting. We’re seeing brain clots and heart clots and lung clots. The commonest causes of death are brain clots – strokes – and then pulmonary embolism, which is a lung clot, and also heart clots – heart attacks. I personally think these should be investigated.’
Dolan: Wouldn’t pausing the vaccine rollout put us back into the mess of the pandemic?
‘Not really, because we now know there are many safe, effective treatments for Covid. It is not an untreatable condition. There’s a very safe medicine called ivermectin, very low-cost, and around for 40 years, registered on the WHO’s database since 1992. And they’ve only registered 20 deaths since 1992. It’s been given billions of times, used against tropical parasites and available over-the-counter in many countries.’
Dolan: Should the vaccine be given to children over 12?
‘It’s unnecessary and dangerous. A child has more chance of dying from a vaccination – looking at these figures – than they do from Covid.’
Dolan: Is the relatively small risk from the vaccine better than getting Covid? It’s certainly a nasty virus.
‘I think we all have a robust immune system, if you’re not vulnerable and not very elderly. Our immune systems are geared up to deal with viruses, bacteria and others. A lot of the side-effects we see from Covid – the long Covid and so on – can be prevented by early treatment.
‘The doctors using ivermectin say you don’t get long Covid if you treat with it in the early stages. If you’ve got a treatment for Covid, you don’t have to be afraid of Covid.’
Dolan: What’s your professional verdict on 16 months of rolling out lockdowns in the UK and across the world?
‘I haven’t seen any good evidence that lockdowns or masks work. More concerning, we’ve known that ivermectin works for some time, and doctors have been trying to communicate this message to the authorities, who have been very single-minded in their strategy and approach. If ivermectin had been employed last year, when the UK authorities were notified, there would have been no lockdown in my opinion.’
Dolan: Why do you think your message about applications such as ivermectin were ignored?
‘I think there are a lot of forces at play . . . Covid is probably a £100billion-a-year industry, and ivermectin and other generic medicines are very cheap.’
Lawrie adds: ‘I think it’s time everybody took more responsibility for their health. Get themselves in better shape, be careful of what they eat – not just the quantity and the calories, but the nutritional value; exercise, and sunlight, and including taking responsibility for getting the information. Anybody can go to the Yellow Card system and have a look at the data. It’s not that easy on the government system, but there is a group called UK Column with a website that’s really easy to navigate. They update the data every week. You can type in a problem, and see what other people are reporting too.
‘I would encourage everybody, if you have the vaccine today and tomorrow you have some kind of problem, to report it – it may be associated with the vaccine, and there might be many other people who are suffering a similar thing. It’s only by highlighting these things that we will be able to ask the government to investigate.’
“The bottom line is simply this: There is utterly unfounded public hysteria, driven by the media and politicians. It’s outrageous. This is the greatest hoax ever perpetrated on an unsuspecting public. There is absolutely nothing that can be done to contain this virus, other than protecting the older, more vulnerable people. It should be thought of as nothing more than a bad flu season. This is not ebola; it’s not SARS. It’s politics playing medicine, and that’s a very dangerous game.”
Dr. Roger Hodkinson is the former Chairman of the Royal College of Physicians and Surgeons committee in Ottawa, Canada. Hodkinson is the CEO of Western Medical Assessments and has been the Company’s Medical Director for over 20 years. He received his general medical degrees from Cambridge University (UK). He is a medical specialist in pathology, which includes virology.
Iceland and Gibraltar have more than 90% of their populations vaccinated and are experiencing a massive increase in Covid cases!
Face-based information such as this is dismissed as “Covid misinformation” by the corrupt medical establishment, social media, and the presstitute whores.
COVID Hits Carnival Cruise Ship Despite ALL Crew and Passengers VACCINATED! See this.
Stop the Insanity Immediately!
Dr. Ryan Cole Explains that the Vaccine causes Covid Illnesses:
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Dr. Paul Craig Roberts writes on his blog site, PCR Institute for Political Economy, where this article was originally published. He is a frequent contributor to Global Research.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Shut up and submit” is now the favorite Covid cure of some of America’s leading progressives. Paul Krugman, a Nobel Prize winner and New York Times columnist, revealed on Tuesday that since freedom is a mirage, people have no good reason not to comply with endless government commands. Unfortunately, punitive panaceas are increasingly popular among both politicians and pundits.
Krugman breezily expunges years of Supreme Court rulings to remove any impediment to forcibly injecting a hundred million Americans with an experimental vaccine. Krugman explains that “when people on the right talk about ‘freedom’ what they actually mean is closer to “defense of privilege” — specifically the right of certain people (generally white male Christians) to do whatever they want.” Blacks and Hispanics have lower rates of Covid vaccinations than whites, but the freedom of minority groups is apparently irrelevant because some Trump supporters are anti-vax loudmouths.
Other progressive stalwarts have jumped on the Iron Fist bandwagon. Pundit Matthew Yglesias declared that people should either take $50 for getting vaccinated now “or else you get jabbed later while someone holds you down and you get $0.” Washington Post columnist Ruth Marcus, who previously championed legal immunity for Bush administration torturers and sneered at Americans who complained about intrusive TSA searches, calls for mandating vaccines because it’s “time to stop coddling the reckless.” Maximizing misery is Marcus’s health prescription: “The more inconvenient we make life for the unvaccinated, the better our own lives will be.” Similarly, Harvard professor Joseph Allen, writing in the Washington Post on Tuesday, scoffed: “Why are so many people acting like this [vaccine mandate] is some kind of affront to our liberties?…. We have a silver bullet that can end this crisis. Why are we afraid to pull the trigger?”
Krugman’s condemnation of other Americans hinges on the presumed omniscience of federal regulators. Krugman declares, “We now have highly effective vaccines freely available to every American who is at least 12 years old. There has been a lot of hype about “breakthrough” infections associated with the Delta variant, but they remain rare.”
But not as rare as honest federal statistics. The CDC in May ceased keeping track of “breakthrough” infections unless they resulted in hospitalization or death. The Biden administration guaranteed that the vast majority of “breakthrough” infections would not be counted. Thus, Fauci and others could endlessly appear on television and derided any suggestion that they were occurring in serious numbers. The CDC pockets $8 billion a year in tax dollars but can’t be bothered to gather the data that would be the best guide to the efficacy of the vaccines.
After a Covid outbreak affecting more than 500 vaccinated individuals at Provincetown had spurred headlines in Massachusetts for almost a week, the CDC finally issued a report on July 29 belatedly conceding vaccines failed to prevent new infections. Hundreds of staffers at two San Francisco hospitals tested Covid positive last month, even though 75-80% had been vaccinated.
Abroad, the efficacy of vaccines is fading faster than the reliability of last season’s campaign promises. Germany just announced that it will start new injections due to “quickly subsiding immune response after a full Covid-19 vaccination in certain groups of people.” Half the new Covid cases in Israel were fully vaxxed & cases are “getting to severe and critical conditions.” In Singapore, “75 percent of new infections reportedly occur in people who are partially and fully vaccinated.” On Tuesday, the CDC warned Americans against traveling to Ireland because of “very high” Covid risks due to outbreaks – even though 67% of Irish have had at least one Covid vaccination.
On Tuesday, a front-page Washington Post headline hailed the success of the U.S. government effort: “U.S. Hits Biden’s Vaccine Goal Late.” The accompanying article included a progress update from the Biden White House’s Covid-19 Data Director, triumphally echoed across the American media landscape.
This is reminiscent of Stalin’s 1930 boast about being “dizzy with success” about the rapid forcible seizure of private farmland for Soviet collective farms. Unvaccinated Americans are the new Kulaks, endlessly vilified and blamed for being “wreckers” of the Biden salvation scheme. Soviet agriculture statistics shunted aside the far superior output of the remaining private farms. Similarly, Biden’s Covid policy ignores the natural immunity possessed by the 119 million Americans who have survived Covid, according to CDC statistics. Stalin’s collectivization drive resulted in a famine that killed up to 10 million people in the Ukraine and elsewhere in the Soviet Union. Hopefully we won’t see another parallel on that score: the New York Times covered up that 1930s catastrophe, publishing false reports claiming that there was no famine (and winning a Pulitzer in the bargain).
Do some progressives see Covid mandates as simply another chance to virtue signal? Ruth Marcus hailed D.C. Mayor Muriel Bowser for “having wisely reimposed a mask mandate in the city.” Bowser decreed a $1,000 fine for people violating her mask decree – which applies even to people waiting outside for a bus. The fact that Bowser was speedily caught violating her own edict is irrelevant to the sanctity of mask mandates. Marcus, like other herd journalists, may be totally clueless on the data showing that masks fail to prevent the spread of Covid, as AIER has repeatedly documented. But masks remain invaluable as a tool for the mathematically illiterate to demonstrate their devotion to “science and data.”
Freedom is rapidly being defined to connote whatever privileges remain after citizens submit to the latest decrees. New York City just decreed that vaccination passes will be required for citizens to go to restaurants, gyms, and entertainment venues. In his press conference Tuesday, Mayor Bill deBlasio said: “And if you do get vaccinated, and you’re around fully vaccinated people, you still have more freedom than folks who are not vaccinated. So, it’s really strategic.” Did New York City voters realize at the last election that they were designating a czar who could impose unlimited restrictions on their movement throughout the Big Apple?
“In time, we hate that which we often fear,” William Shakespeare wrote four centuries ago. Covid policy nowadays seems driven more by rage and hatred than by facts which debunk official storylines. Twitter followers exalt Krugman for asserting “the rhetoric of freedom is actually about privilege.” Unfortunately, plenty of prominent poohbahs are enjoying the privilege of trying to destroy other Americans’ freedom.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
James Bovard is the author of ten books, including Public Policy Hooligan, Attention Deficit Democracy, The Bush Betrayal, and Lost Rights: The Destruction of American Liberty. He has written for the New York Times, Wall Street Journal, Playboy, Washington Post, New Republic, Reader’s Digest, and many other publications. He is a member of the USA Today Board of Contributors, a frequent contributor to The Hill, and a contributing editor for American Conservative.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Turkey will not accept the “irresponsible” decision taken by the United States regarding the resettlement of Afghan refugees, because the plan addresses Turkey as the target country for application of the migration procedures, Foreign Ministry spokesperson Tanju Bilgiç said on Aug. 3.
In a written statement, the spokesperson recalled that the U.S. Department of State announced on Aug. 2, that Afghan nationals and their families, who have worked for the U.S. Government, U.S.-based NGO’s and press corps, will be allowed to apply within the framework of the Refugee Admissions Program Priority 2, Afghan nationals Program from third countries via respective agencies they have been employed in.
Turkey has also been suggested as a possible application spot, he added.
“This announcement will cause a major refugee crisis in our region and increase the misery of Afghans on the migration routes. Instead of looking for a solution among countries within the region, seeking a solution in Turkey without our consent is unacceptable,” the spokesperson said.
Hosting the highest number of refugees for the last seven years, Turkey does not have the capacity to bear another refugee crisis for another country, he said, adding that Ankara does not accept the US’ “irresponsible decision taken without prior consultation.”
The U.S. may directly transport these people by plane, he said.
“Turkey will not take over the international responsibilities of third countries and will not tolerate abuse of our laws by third countries for their own purposes under any circumstances. The Turkish nation cannot bear the burden of refugee crises resulting from the decisions undertaken by third countries,” Bilgiç said.
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
It is an objective, indisputable fact: never in the history of the world has there been a global push to administer an experimental medicine to all of humanity, billions of us, at the same time.
I want you to stop and reflect on that. Imagine the hubris it required both to carry out this plan and to propagandize the world to carry it out.
“Hubris?” you ask. “What do you mean?”
The Covid vaccines are experimental. The FDA has not approved them.
Most vaccines require years to test and approve, in no small part because we want to make sure they don’t have dangerous long-term side effects, which they can have; the CDC has published a list of problems with selected approved vaccines. Many experimental vaccines never make it out of the experimental phase. CNN made similar points back when Trump was, wrongheadedly (I thought so at the time) pushing for rapid approval of the Covid vaccines. Of course, the mercurial news organization hastened to forget all that when the Biden administration decided rapid vaccine deployment was a good idea. They shouldn’t have: for all the good they certainly have done, physicians warn us that vaccines can be dangerous for some, and experimental vaccines are, naturally, even more so.
It is an objective, indisputable fact: never in the history of the world has there been a global push to administer an experimental medicine to all of humanity, billions of us, at the same time.
Again, my point is simple and absolutely factual. Again:
You have to be willing to trust the welfare of billions of people not just to the honesty of our leaders and scientists—because things can go wrong for decent people. You must also trust their competence—and not just that, because competent people can make surprising, unforeseeable mistakes. You must also trust that we avoided the worst, that we dodged a bullet, and that they actually succeeded in making a more or less safe vaccine.
Of course, maybe they did. I sure hope so. But what if we discover some horrifically high incidence of catastrophic side-effects that do not show up for two or five or ten years? Scientists tell us that that is possible. It is unfortunately possible that more people will die from these experimental vaccines than would have died from a virus that kills fewer than 1% of those who contract it.
Do not misunderstand me. I am not claiming that is happening. I am not even saying that it is terribly likely. I am saying it is possible, because these are experimental vaccines.
Frankly, the hubris required for carrying out this plan, and for taking the lead in propagandizing the world to carry it out, is jaw-dropping and scary to me. If a world leader is willing to take such gambles with all of humanity, what else are they prepared to do? I really wonder. If suddenly you became a president or top medical system leader or media organization owner, would you want to take an action that, if you were wrong, might spell the death of millions? First, do no harm. We haven’t heard that old medical byword very much recently.
My family received our childhood vaccinations, by the way, with no issues. I am not an anti-vaxxer. I am an anti-global-all-at-once-experimental-vaxxer. There is a big difference.
This is not even to touch the question whether these experimental vaccines should be mandated, i.e., if you should lose your basic civil rights if you fail to be vaccinated. Maybe I will write about that question, definitely a non-medical question, separately another time. There is indeed much, much more to say.
But my present point is simple: experimental vaccine—billions of people—at the same time. It utterly boggles the mind that so many otherwise reasonable people have been influenced to think this is a good idea.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
In the coming months, in the run up to the crucial COP26 climate talks in Scotland, there will be a slew of false solutions on climate change announced, whether carbon, capture and storage (CCS) or carbon offsetting.
For years, climate campaigners have argued that offsetting carbon emissions does not work for the simple reason that it allows companies to carry on polluting.
But more and more companies are using offsets as a way of greenwashing their operations, arguing that they are on a path to net zero.
And of course, the oil industry spindoctors at the American Petroleum Institute also advocated offsetting in their fundamentally flawed Climate Action Plan, which they published earlier this year.
And now there is even more evidence that they are a completely false solution to our climate emergency. The development charity Oxfam has a new report out today which has analysed just how much land is needed for carbon offsetting techniques, including planting trees and Bioenergy with carbon capture and storage (BECCs).
Put simply, there is not enough land on the planet. Oxfam calculates “that the total amount of land required for planned carbon removal could potentially be five times the size of India, or the equivalent of all the farmland on the planet.”
Or put another way:
“Land used exclusively for carbon removal that could compete with food production could range up to 1.62bn ha, which is more than the total existing cropland,” says Oxfam.
The development charity analysed the net zero targets of just four of the big oil and gas producers: Shell, BP, Total and ENI.
According to Oxfam:
“Their plans alone could require an area of land twice the size of the UK. If the oil and gas sector as a whole adopted similar net zero targets, it could end up requiring land that is nearly half the size of the United States, or one-third of the world’s farmland.”
This could increase food prices by about 80% by 2050, pushing “millions more people in vulnerable communities into hunger.”
It is a nonsensical solution to climate change. As Oxfam says in its report:
“What is needed is an immediate, dramatic and irreversible reduction in the billions of tonnes of carbon these countries and corporations are pumping into the atmosphere on a daily basis.”
Danny Sriskandarajah, the chief executive of Oxfam GB, told the Guardian:
“Too many companies and governments are hiding behind the smokescreen of ‘net zero’ to continue dirty business-as-usual activities.”
Sriskandarajah continued:
“A prime example of the doublethink we are seeing is the oil and gas sector trying to justify its ongoing extraction of fossil fuels by promising unrealistic carbon removal schemes that require ludicrous amounts of land.”
And there is another problem with offsetting. As the wildfires in the Pacific North West of the US continue to burn, they are now destroying forests that have been planted to offset carbon emissions, effectively making the offsets worse than useless. Offsets are meant to store the carbon, not emit them into the atmosphere.
The Financial Times reports today that “Forests in the US that generate the carbon offsets bought by companies including BP and Microsoft are on fire as summer blazes rage in North America.”
“In Washington and Oregon, at least two forestry projects used by companies including BP and Microsoft are ablaze.” Last month, fires burnt through the Colville Indian Reservation in Washington, damaging a project that BP has bought 13m offsets from in transaction valued at more than $100m.
Meanwhile, in Oregon, the infamous Bootleg fire destroyed forests that provided Microsoft with offsets too.
Others are concerned too:
Some people make it seem as if we’re not doing enough to stop the climate crisis. But that’s not true.
Because to not do enough, you have to do something. And the truth is that we are basically not doing anything apart from “creative carbon accounting” and creating loopholes.1/2
So we enter a vicious circle: fossil fuels are causing climate change, leading to excessive heat which is causing wildfires which are destroying the trees planted to offset carbon emissions. It makes no sense. And that is before we start to take away farmland from an already hungry world.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Director Chloe Zhao has created a somber, almost tragic look back, look now and look to the possible future for many of us working stiffs. The film is called Nomadland (2021) starring Frances McDormand as Fern, a 60 something widow forced out of her previous life and onto the road. The town where she had lived with her late husband, Empire, Nevada, was a company town for a gypsum mining concern that had supplied most of the inhabitants (including Fern and her husband) with employment for generations.
The recession of 2008- 2010 caused the company to go bust… along with most of the employees. Everything in the small town basically went under. Fern found herself with no home and no source of income. She took the advice of a friend and began to live in her van. Fern took work at the nearest Amazon depot until she had enough of that dreary work existence. She became a Nomad.
The film actually uses a few real life Nomads as characters. Who else can convey what this way of life is all about than someone who lives it?
The sadness mixed in with the close fraternity of these folks brought tears to this writer’s eyes. Then the anger set in. A whole community of people who live between the margins, having to continually travel to and fro, finding part time jobs to subsidize them for a brief period, speaks loudly of the brutality of this Corporate/Capitalist system.
Marc Levin’s fine 2012 documentary, Lost on Long Island walks hand in hand with Chloe Zhao’s film. Levin actually followed a group of Long Island, NY, residents, mostly from the financial industry, who got laid off during the aforementioned recession. To see these folks go either underwater on their homes or foreclosed, with no real substantial employment should have been a ‘Wakeup call’ for all working stiffs. Apparently it has not! Director Mark Herman’s 1996 film, Brassed Off was based loosely on the 1984 UK miners’ strike to keep 20 coal mines from closing. Again, it revealed how tragic it was, especially for the older men, when faced with little hope for an economic future.
In a nutshell, many working stiffs are perhaps a few paychecks away from becoming what I will call Economic Nomads.
As it is, when less than 10 % of private sector working stiffs belong to unions, the dice will fall the wrong way. The goal of the Super Rich is to see more of us forced to become part time workers with little or no benefits, or if full time, to be Independent Contractors with again no benefits or protections.
On top of that, these Super Rich control rental housing nationwide, as they bought up millions of foreclosed homes since the ’08 economic downturn at fire sale prices, and became landlords. How many working stiffs are paying outrageous monthly rents, sometimes accounting for well over 30% of their earnings? Bad enough that husband and wife have to both work, regardless of children, but what about the single mom? How does a mother of even two kids stay above water financially?
To solve many of our current dilemma we need Socialism.
Let Amazon and ALL corporations be owned and run by its workers and not top heavy executives. Let the banks and rental properties be owned by localities in a low profit arrangement. Imagine a mortgage bank charging but overhead. Imagine a housing development being owned by the community, charging fair rents… AND the opportunity for each tenant to own their residence.
If 25% of the monthly rent was held in escrow until such time that the tenant could afford to take out a mortgage… just imagine how many working stiffs could have a place of their own. In the UK doctors are employed by the National Health on salary, with no need to worry about excessive malpractice insurance or how to find and keep patients. No one in that nation would ever dare to switch with us as to their coverage.
Imagine if small businesses were held on the pedestal they should be at.
Imagine if Uncle Sam subsidized small business owners to afford to pay a real and viable living wage… Let us say $20 per hour. Uncle Sam sets the bar at $10 hourly per employee for the owner’s share, and pays out the other $ 10 to the employer.
With all that Uncle Sam has been shelling out to bail out Wall Street etc, this plan would not only save small business Mom and Pop America, but Stimulate the economy! Let us leave the nomads to the history books.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Philip A Farruggio is regular columnist on It’s the Empire… stupid website. He is also frequently posted on Nation of Change, and Countercurrents.org,. He is the son and grandson of Brooklyn NYC longshoremen and a graduate of Brooklyn College, class of 1974. Since the 2000 election debacle Philip has written over 400 columns on the Military Industrial Empire and other facets of life in an upside down America. He is also host of the ‘It’s the Empire… Stupid‘ radio show, co produced by Chuck Gregory. Philip can be reached at [email protected]
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Important interview with Dr Piers Robinson, an expert on communication, media and world politics, focusing on conflict and war and especially the role of propaganda, Co-Director of the Organisation for Propaganda Studies, From 2016 – 2019, he was Professor and Chair in Politics, Society and Political Journalism at the University of Sheffield.
Dr Piers Robinson, an expert on communication, media and world politics, focusing on conflict and war and especially the role of propaganda.
He is presently Co-Director of the Organisation for Propaganda Studies, Convenor of the Working Group on Syria, Propaganda and Media and Associated Researcher with the Working Group on Propaganda and the 9/11 ‘War on Terror’.
From 2016 – 2019, he was Professor and Chair in Politics, Society and Political Journalism at the University of Sheffield.
Dr Robinson has served on the boards of several academic journals. He has lectured at the NATO Defense College in Rome and briefed senior UK military commanders and diplomats.
His Research interests focus on Organised Persuasive Communication and Contemporary Propaganda and his current projects include Propaganda and the Syrian conflict; Propaganda and the 9/11 Global War on Terror and Covid19.
Dr Robinson’s books include the Routledge Handbook of Media, Conflict and Security (2016), Pockets of Resistance: British news media, war and theory in the 2003 invasion of Iraq, (2010) and The CNN Effect: the myth of news, foreign policy and intervention (2002).
Asia Pacific Today believes that your opinion is legitimate. And we believe that our guests have something to say and that their opinion is also legitimate. Throughout the week, Mike Ryan has discussions about politics, polarising issues, current events, and more. We really are connecting with people all over the world that simply speak their mind. There’s new videos throughout the week, every week. And we also need our audience to grow. It would really help us grow if you could subscribe to our Channel.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Data from Israel, where the vast majority of the population has been injected with the Pfizer mRNA concoction, show those “vaccinated” against COVID-19 and unvaccinated have the same infection rate, regardless of age. Empirical data from other countries also reveal the injections have no effect on transmission
Ivor Cummins suspects the obsession with COVID-19 injections has to do with profiteering and with justifying vaccine passports. The enormous emphasis on getting nearly everyone the COVID injection may also be related to elimination of the control group, which will effectively hide the real damage the injection is doing
Moderna and Pfizer have eliminated the original control groups by giving controls the real injection. This was done even though the trials are officially ongoing for another two years. So, there are no official control groups against which to assess the effectiveness and safety of these injections
Side effects of the COVID shots are vastly under-reported, so it’s very difficult to get a grasp on the real-world magnitude of the risks. According to a CDC whistleblower, the Vaccine Adverse Event Reporting System (VAERS) under-reports deaths by a factor of five or more
In sworn testimony, the whistleblower claims 45,000 Americans had died within three days of their COVID shots as of July 9, 2021. The numbers get even higher when looking at deaths occurring within a week or two of the injections
In this interview, Ivor Cummins shares his insights about the ineffectiveness of COVID countermeasures, and how to stay healthy in this time of COVID-19. While he does not have formal medical training, he’s well-trained in the scientific method and has a very analytical and logical mind. As common sense has become all too uncommon, we need people like Cummins to remind us what the obvious common-sense conclusions are, and how to logically interpret data.
He has a biochemical engineering degree, and has spent the last eight or nine years researching metabolic health. In March 2020, his wife became concerned about SARS-CoV-2, which led him start analyzing the data surrounding COVID-19.
“I did a quick check and found the Diamond Princess data,” Cummins says. “So, I put a ceiling on the infection fatality rate, maybe around 0.2%, massively stacked towards people who were elderly and infirm, and I told her, ‘No, this has nothing to do with us effectively. It’s going to be the equivalent of a bad flu, or severe flu season.’
And then I watched the lockdowns come in, which came straight from China. I watched as the seasonal problem in Europe collapsed as expected in April. And they didn’t want to take the lockdowns out.
Then they wanted more restrictions, and then they starting whooping about a vaccine … They then brought in masks in Northern Europe in the summer, and that’s when I knew we were in serious trouble because in Northern Europe, there was nothing going on.
The hospitals were empty. The ICUs were empty. We were in the seasonal kind of trough. Yet they brought in mandatory masks and everyone started wearing them. I stayed on it after that.”
What’s Behind the COVID Jab Narrative?
Cummins’ primary concern with the COVID-19 injections is that the benefit is basically nonexistent for healthy people under the age of 60. He cites data from Israel, where the vast majority of the population has been injected with the Pfizer mRNA concoction, that unvaccinated and “vaccinated” have the same infection rate, regardless of age. Empirical data from other countries also reveal the injections have no effect on transmission.
“The pharma companies did acknowledge it may not affect transmission,” he says.“Mechanistically, it shouldn’t really affect transmission. And the real-world data say it doesn’t. So, the push to vaccinate is not based on any science, really, at all. It’s just based on a desire. And you’ve got to question that desire.
What is the obsession with trying to get everyone vaccinated? I feel that part of it has to do with profiteering and pharma influence, obviously. Part of it has to do with justifying a vaccine passport or permits.
And part of it, I think, is that there’s a fear that having a substantial control group, say 20%, 30% of people who are not vaccinated, will clearly show that the unvaccinated, unless they’ve got particular medical conditions, really are no worse off and are not causing transmission. So, I think there is a desire now to eliminate the control group.
A control group shows that your medication or your lockdown isn’t so hot. So, I think that’s another driver. A bit of desperation is coming in to get rid of the control group and just get everyone vaccinated, and then you can’t see the signal anymore.”
Official Control Groups Have Been Eliminated
This is in fact precisely what Moderna and Pfizer have done: Both have eliminated the original control groups in their initial COVID injection trials by giving controls the real mRNA shot. This was done even though the trials are officially ongoing for another two years. So, they have already eliminated the control groups in the trials against which to assess the effectiveness and safety of these injections. Cummins comments:
“The whole thing is kind of a sham, and you don’t have to be a conspiracy theorist to say it’s a sham. Basically, elementary science has been inverted, turned upside down, macerated, flushed down the urinal. And that’s without even getting into complicated stuff. It’s crazy.
I mean, most people don’t even realize it’s under emergency use authorization (EUA). A guy in Ireland went to seven pharmacies and asked them the question, ‘What’s the risk to my 20-year-old daughter from COVID? And what’s the risk of side effects from the medication?’ And they couldn’t really answer.
Pretty much all of them said emphatically, ‘This is fully tested.’ He showed them the documentation, that it’s emergency use only. It’s not fully [approved]. And they were kind of surprised. So even all the people administering [the COVID injections] are just not aware of any of the facts, it appears.
The pharmacists in question thought side effects were 1 in hundreds of thousands. But the Johnson & Johnson leaflet that this guy brought in showed up to 1 in 10,000 chance of a serious clot in brain, lymph or spleen, et cetera.
So, they weren’t even really aware of the contents of the leaflet … So, there’s no informed consent because the person administering [the injection] doesn’t understand the [risks], and certainly the person getting it doesn’t.”
Side Effects and Deaths Are Vastly Underreported
Unfortunately, many countries simply aren’t reporting side effects, so it’s very difficult to get a grasp on the real-world magnitude of the risks involved with these injections. As noted by Cummins:
“In Ireland, I have people on the inside of the medical system, and overwhelmingly, nothing’s getting recorded. When people have a reaction, they send them to the emergency room. The emergency room just deals with it. No one picks up a pencil or a pen. I mean, that’s just across the board. So, I’ve heard the estimate that on average, the recorded issues, you might be able to multiply by 5 to 10 to get the actual number.”
July 19, 2021, America’s Frontline Doctors filed a motion to stop the emergency use authorization of COVID injections for children under 18, anyone with natural immunity and anyone who has not been given proper informed consent.1,2,3
In their motion, the group included a sworn statement by a CDC whistleblower, a computer programmer with expertise in health care data analytics who has access to Medicare and Medicaid data maintained by the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services (CMS). Over the last 20 years, she has developed more than 100 health care fraud detection algorithms for use in the public and private sectors.
According to this whistleblower, the Vaccine Adverse Event Reporting System (VAERS) indeed under-reports deaths by a factor of five or more. In her sworn testimony, she claims 45,000 Americans had died within three days of their COVID shots as of July 9, 2021. The numbers get even higher when looking at deaths occurring within a week or two of the injections.
According to the official narrative, there’s no solid evidence to prove the COVID shots actually caused these deaths, but as noted by Cummins, the data does show clear correlation, as reactions are occurring primarily in the first week or two after the injection. After that, reports of reactions drop significantly. This is evidence of association, as otherwise, you’d see a flat curve of reactions over four or six weeks.
Brainwashing Effort Without Equal
As noted by Cummins, studies have revealed that it only takes a couple of months to brainwash people, at which point their reasoning ability has been effectively destroyed. “They just can’t see reason after that because their brain has been [re]formed,” he says. We’ve now been under a constant 24/7 barrage of misleading propaganda for a year and a half.
“I compare it to 1930s Germany,” Cummins says, “and I’m very specific. Some people get very angry about referring back to that period. But I’m not referring to the Holocaust. I’m not referring to the ‘40s. I refer back to 1930s Germany, when Goebbels and the rest of them, they put a radio in every house, free of charge, I believe.
They knew, ‘Once we’ve got a conduit, or a channel into every house, and we feed them what we want to feed them, we’ve got them.’ I think there was a quote from one of the Nazi party [who said], ‘Give me control of the media, and I will turn any nation into a nation of pigs.’ They had contempt for the people. But they were very smart, and they pulled off, obviously, an absolute horror.
People get really angry if you compare it to that period but it’s a perfect analogy. Take over the media, mass propaganda for sustained periods, and then you can almost do what you want. I mean, the nonsense that they’ve come out with, so many times in the last year, people should just laugh at it. It should be a farce, a comedy.
But people are not laughing. They’ve just gotten used to being fed umbilically from the media and the professors and experts. And no matter what nonsense they say, they just take it on board.”
In the 80 years since then, there’s been an exponential increase in technology, which correspondingly exponentially increases the ability and effectiveness of propaganda. People are more effectively brainwashed these days, and there’s no doubt this has been the most effective propaganda campaign in the history of the world.
Medicine has been turned on its head, as has science. Many are seemingly bereft of logic and capacity to reason. So, no doubt, the propagandists have succeeded. They’ve won. At this point, it seems almost hopeless to convince anyone that the official narrative is incorrect or false. It doesn’t matter what data you show them.
People aren’t even swayed by family members dying within days of getting their COVID shots. They still insist it’s the best way forward and agree that everyone ought to get the injections, including themselves, and off they rush to get their booster.
How to Improve Your Immune System
Anyone familiar with natural health will probably agree that having a robust immune system is your best bet against any and all infections. Cummins’ specialty is metabolic flexibility, which is also a foundational component of immune function. He explains:
“Metabolic health is the center of everything, and immune health is inextricably linked to it. I interviewed Dr. Ron Rosedale … April 4, 2020 … when the [COVID pandemic] was starting. Leptin is a cytokine. It’s intimately involved in the immune system response.
If you are leptin or insulin resistant, then your immune system will overreact in one sense, [causing a] cytokine storm, and you will under-react in other parts of the immune system.
He made the point, and I agreed with him, that if you knew SARS-CoV-2 was coming, you don’t need to spend four or five months getting fit. You don’t need to lose all the weight. Within days, your insulin and leptin levels will collapse if you just suddenly switch to meat, fish and eggs, no processed food, [plus] vitamins and minerals.
Literally within the first day your leptin and insulin will be falling fast, and in a few weeks, you’re going to be utterly more capable of changing a serious illness into a mild course of illness, or even of changing a death into just a nasty round.
And that was in early April 2020. I honestly thought this would be an opportunity to show people this. But of course, the thing got so insane, no one cared about the virus except vaccines. Propaganda took over. And it’s almost poignant now to have those lectures. Back in April, we were bang on the money.
If you drop your insulin and leptin, and you raise your vitamin D — which will rise anyway as you lower insulin resistance, automatically — if you do all the stuff that we’ve talked about for years about cholesterol, insulin, fat, keto, low carb, all the stuff for longevity and health, you just apply essentially the same stuff rapidly, you’re going to collapse your risk from this virus.
But no one was allowed to see that. In fact, the FDA last summer put in an injunction against a natural health website that was just talking about vitamin D importance. They told them, ‘You’re not allowed to do that. It’s not approved.’”
I was one of the sites the FDA issued that warning to. Like others, I was told I could not state that vitamin D’s ability to improve health and immune function might have any influence on getting SARS-CoV-2 infection or surviving the infection.
“I know it’s associational,” Cummins says. “I did three short talks with slides, again in early April, on the emerging data from Philippines and elsewhere. It was clear as day that people [with vitamin D levels] over 40 ng/mL, or 100 nmol/L, who are metabolically healthy had massively lower chance of severe illness or mortality, even when correcting for age.
So, it was clear as day that if you eat nutrient-dense food, drop your insulin and leptin, get healthy sun exposure, and maybe supplements, and you get your vitamin D status up, you’re going to go into that group that has vastly lower risk, and even sub-flu risk.”
Why Avoid Processed Seed Oils?
If you’re doing keto, be aware that not all fats are made equal. I suspect omega-6 linoleic acid (LA) may actually be more harmful to your metabolism and overall health than processed carbs. When asked to opine on this topic, Cummins responds:
“It’s a tricky one because I’m finding it hard to come to a definite answer. Refined carbs and processed carbs are really bad. We know that from all the science. We know from huge amounts of science that seed oils are a major problem … All the stuff associated with excessive LA, a massive body of knowledge, was suppressed.
There were studies in the ‘90s showing mammary cancers in rats, a whole load of animal studies. Then they stopped being done, and the reason was because they were saying these were heart-healthy vegetable oils. The system didn’t want people finding problems. So, I’d agree there’s a huge amount of data to say don’t touch them. They’re a serious problem.
There’s obesity studies in mice and rats that are dramatic in terms of adipogenesis, or fat creation … I often say the Devil’s triad is refined carbohydrates, sugars and seed oils. And those three make up most ultra-processed food. So, you have to hit the triad.
If a person gives up the seed oils but eats loads of refined carbs and drinks Coca-Cola for 30 years, they’re going to end up in trouble probably. If they have seed oils at a few percent of diet, not huge, and they eliminate the refined carbs, I wonder how badly would they end up? It’s a tricky one.”
I’ve taken a more hardcore position against seed oils and LA, as pre-1850, when industrialized food processing first began, the amount of LA found in human fat tissue was around 1% to 2%. Today, it’s between 20% and 30%.
I believe anything above 2% is excessive and radically increases oxidative stress that can decimate your cell membranes, mitochondria, protein, stem cells and DNA. And it takes up to seven years to eliminate the LA buildup from your body as it is stored in your cell membranes.
I also now believe that once you’re metabolically flexible, excluding healthy carbohydrates (not processed ones, of course) can be detrimental. I’m metabolically flexible and will personally not go lower than 50 grams of healthy carbs a day, largely because I exercise three to four hours a day. On many days, I eat 150 to 200 grams of carbs, typically from fruit. Despite that, I’m still in ketosis and have very low visceral body fat.
When I tried going low-carb, under 50 grams, for extended period of times, my health declined. So, provided you’re metabolically flexible, I believe carbs are healthy. This is why I believe LA is far more dangerous than carbs. You also don’t need to detox from excess carbs. Just stop eating them and your insulin resistance will immediately drop.
Ideology, Not Science, Rules the Day
While governments lean on the precautionary principle to justify lockdowns and mask mandates, the precautionary principle is not followed when it comes to the COVID injections.
“It just shows that this is an ideology,” Cummins says. “It’s not about science. It was never about science. It’s about economics, profiteering, control, getting in ID cards. Probably, digital currency will be coming in. They want the ID card to get everyone’s metrics locked in for access. All of these bad things, they’re all ideologies. None of them are scientific.
Now they’re coming after the kids. I mean, you don’t have to be anti-vax, you just have to be rational, to look at the impact of SARS-CoV-2, look at the vaccine data and the real-world empirical data of the country comparisons that show the vaccine’s not doing much. And then look at what they’re actually trying to do — vaccinate all the children — and you just know it’s completely perverse…
But we have to accept reality. I often say to people who are getting despondent … you have to be stoical. I fight the misinformation seven days a week. But if it turns out that the bad guys are getting dreadful things implemented, I refuse to let myself become despondent, or miserable, or give up.
I just hardened myself that I will not be brought down by this, no matter how bad it gets. Even if they get ID cards and you’re jabbed, and tracked, and traced, you’ve still got to be the resistance. You’ve still got to live. And you’ve still got to oppose it and stay healthy. Stay around to oppose it.
Look at the French resistance in World War II. Dreadful conditions. Dreadful. They had to sleep with the enemy, literally. If they were caught, they were tortured and murdered. For around a year or two, things looked absolutely grim, that they were not going to win. But they kept at it.”
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Many of the breakthroughs in rocketry, space science and the atom which so profoundly altered the world during the 20th century happened within the unfortunate momentum generated by wars both hot and cold.
In these days of profound uncertainty, it is comforting knowing that certain fundamental truths still exist and serve as guiding lights through the dark waters.
Among the highest of those fundamental truths are those enunciated in 1967 by Reverend Martin Luther King who ruminated over the dangers of imperialism and nuclear war by stating “we still have a choice today: nonviolent co-existence or violent co-annihilation”.
When leaping ahead over five decades past the April 4, 1968 assassination of King to our present time, that truth stands as valid today as ever.
While asymmetric never-ending wars following the ‘Vietnam model’ have continued across the Middle East and while the world faces no shortage of modern Dr. Strangeloves giddy over the visceral power offered by the red button, humanity’s obligation to recognize the scientific truthfulness of King’s words have existential importance.
Now admittedly, some amongst those unipolar ideologues currently shaping today’s great game might vocally agree with MLK’s utterances. Technocrats embedded across the rules-based order of NATO are rarely short of pleasantries when speaking of their aspirations for a world of peace and non-zero sum thinking… but actions speak louder than words.
While the Trans Atlantic governing class continues to drive society ever closer to nuclear confrontation, hyperinflationary money printing and Great Resetting fascism, the Multipolar alliance has taken up the challenge of defending those higher interests of humanity which MLK died defending by placing cooperation and creative growth over the rules defined by closed system geopolitics.
In the face of this race to extinction, the Greater Eurasian Partnership and broader Belt and Road initiative spreading across the face of the globe has pulled more people out of poverty and despair at rates unseen in all history. Yet an under-appreciated aspect of this dynamic has taken the form of the ever-expanding “space silk road” which is what I’d like to discuss in this first of a two-part essay.
The Trans Geopolitical Roots of Space Exploration
Since the days of Jules Verne’s From the Earth to the Moon (1865), the dream of a new space-exploration driven age of mankind was something that animated the scientific imagination of the greatest minds of the 20th century. A generation of German rocket scientists inspired by Fritz Lang’s 1929 Frau Im Mond (Woman in the Moon) innovated new aerodynamic and chemical designs that began making the impossible possible. With every new breakthrough, the realm of ideas that Jules Verne could only dream of became ever more a part of the field of potential shaping humanity’s available pathways.
Imperial geopoliticians seeking to keep humankind locked within a closed system of diminishing returns and monopolized resources on the face of the earth were certainly nervous at the new age that was unfolding.
Like so many technological innovations in human history, many of the breakthroughs in rocketry, space science and the atom which so profoundly altered the world during the 20thcentury happened within the unfortunate momentum generated by wars both hot and cold. Today, many cynics who have drank heavily from the chalice of misanthropy, are quick to pounce on this unfortunate irony as proof that humanity only creates when we are busy killing each other. However, by changing our point of view a bit, we could just as easily conclude that this irony is proof that despite our frequent falls into barbarism (shaped more often than not by oligarchical interests manipulating nations into self-destruction), humanity has the power to create higher goodness even amidst strife. MLK put this in his own words when he said that “the arc of history is long but it bends towards justice”.
Is there a Scientific Case to be made for Martin Luther King’s Optimism?
While it is nice to hear such statements as those uttered by MLK, can we find evidence that this optimistic view of human nature stands on firmer ground than mere rhetoric?
I think there is.
For one thing, were the forces of evil truly more powerful than forces of good, than it stands to reason that the last 100,000+ years would have resulted in mankind either never having made it out of caves, or self-exterminating long ago, leaving the world a much better place in a state of “technology-free” balance.
And yet, here we are. Nearly nine billion members of our fragile species conglomerated on the face of our fragile planet spinning around a sun within a small neighborhood of a small galaxy amidst a cluster of galaxies which we have barely even begun to understand.
It was, after all, not long ago that humanity still believed that all observable spiral galaxies were contained within the confines of the Milky Way. It took the discoveries of Henrietta Swan Leavitt (1868-1921) in the early 20th century to prove that this was not true and that ours was but one of a multitude of galactic islands in the universe (1). It was at this time that breakthroughs in aviation were allowing humanity to finally construct primitive airplanes and breakthroughs in electromagnetism and radiation were expanding our understanding of the structure of space time far beyond the visible zone of light waves, many octaves into the domain of radio waves below infrared and above ultraviolet into shortwave x rays and gamma radiation. With each cognitive leap into the unknown, boundary conditions of our collective knowledge were increased in tandem with our potential carrying capacity as new technologies beneficial to sustaining more people at higher standards of living were made available.
Of course, giving the cynic his/her due, it must be admitted that with each conceptual advance of mind’s grasp of the forces of matter, our freedom to create was increased along with our freedom to destroy.
In 1926, the brilliant Russian biogeochemist Vladimir V.I. Vernadsky (1863-1945) recognized that the thing dubbed the biosphere was not a closed system of Darwinian objects competing in a universe of diminishing returns, but was itself a singular system whose identity was more than the sum of parts, driven by 1) photosynthesis (the power of living matter to transform solar energy into work) 2) a tendency towards increasing the flow of atomic migration of elements, 3) a principle of ubiquity of all life which tended to expand to its fullest and generate new “technologies” to constantly overcome nature’s limits to growth and was 4) the intersection of a multitude of octaves of cosmic radiation from intergalactic space with the lithosphere mediated by nested magnetic fields. The conception outlined in Vernadsky’s Biosphere was that living matter and ecosystems were not localized to the earth, but were rather cosmic processes tied to the entire environment of the solar system and beyond. This concept was not only new but irrefutable and revolutionary. (2)
In 1957, a new milestone was reached as Russia’s Sputnik I satellite broke into orbit and mankind officially became the first space-bound species on record. As humanity extended its sphere of activity beyond the limits of the biosphere, yet more incredible new discoveries were made, such as the existence of nested positively and negatively charged magnetic fields dubbed the Van Allen Belts that were a part of a structure of Birkland currents shaping pathways within electromagnetic fields that allowed fluxes of coronal mass ejections emerging from the sun, and even other stars, to flow into the earth’s biosphere, driving the flow of evolutionary activity over long periods of time.
Scientists across the world soon found themselves looking to these invisible nested arrays of magnetic fields within our galaxy and the dense ocean of cosmic radiation and plasma in order to seek the causes of weather, ice ages, viruses, volcanism, extinction cycles and more. Frank Capra’s 1959 The Strange Case of Cosmic Rays sponsored by Bell Labs provides a glimpse into the trajectory of scientific thinking at this time.
John F. Kennedy Takes the Helm
After Sputnik’s breakthrough, it didn’t take long for humans to follow suite with Yuri Gagarin’s orbital voyage on April 12, 1961. Amidst the fog of assassinations, coups, asymmetric wars and psy ops of the Cold War, space flight continued to offer humanity a pathway out of hell. Seeking desperately for a creative exit from the Game Theory-driven rules of Mutually Assured Destruction, President John F Kennedy embraced the strategic value of space not merely as a geopolitical tool to beat the commies, as is so often portrayed in history books, but as a driving force that could transform the world and the rigged rules of the Cold War. Kennedy’s September 20, 1963 United Nations speech championing the establishment of a joint U.S.-Russian space program is a testament of this strategic outlook which has been too easily forgotten over the years. Additionally, Kennedy made it clear that space exploration generated long term goals and intentions that would “serve to organize and measure the best of our energies and skills”. The stochastic idea of economics defined as “hedonistic beasts with money seeking to maximize their pleasure and reduce their pain while buying low and selling dear” which free marketeers and libertarians advocated could never stand up to this higher conception of capitalism as outlined by Kennedy and the best American System traditions.
Nuclear technology that also emerged in the fires of war similarly found itself forged into tools of creation as well as destruction.
As nuclear bombs were built at record speeds on both sides of the Iron Curtain, civilian nuclear reactors began producing abundant, high quality cheap energy at such rates that for the first time, billions of people could be alleviated from poverty forever. While Russia was less fortunate with her efforts on the Moon, she landed 10 probes on the surface of Venus during the 1961-1984 Venera program and began applying nuclear reactor technology to space craft eventually sending out 30 nuclear reactor units in 30 yeas. In the USA, Kennedy unveiled a program for nuclear rockets under the NERVA program, and Project Rover which promised to offer humanity a means of flying not only to the moon and mars but to the furthest reaches of the solar system and beyond. As the NERVA and Phoebus rockets passed all tests with flying colors (3), programs were outlined to begin Mars colonization with plans to land on the red planet by August 1982.
Even in China, Premier Zhou Enlai had ensured that space pioneer Qian Xuesen had received state support to create a Chinese space program which began in earnest with the 1958 Project 581 which aimed to put a satellite into orbit. Although suffering many setbacks throughout the 1960s-1980s, the Chinese resiliently pushed forward, eventually becoming the third nation to send astronauts into space through their own efforts.
Despite the intrigue and evil that dominated geopolitics these precarious years, the call of a new age of cooperation continued to resonate with milestone achievements as the 1967 Space Treaty, 1969 Moon landing, and Apollo Soyuz 1975 cooperation between U.S. and Russian space agencies.
So What Went Wrong?
So why did the Apollo Program, which had generated revolutionary technologies in every branch of economics and medicine find itself dissolved by 1973 and advanced Saturn rockets retired into museums? Why were Kennedy’s offers to the Soviet Union dropped upon his death despite the fact that Khrushchev wrote of his desires that they happen? Why did NASA’s budget peak in 1964 maxing at 4% of GDP and find its funding drained into the war in Vietnam, never to rise again? Why were the nuclear rocket programs dismantled in 1972 despite having beaten all expectations? Why did the Apollo-Soyuz program fail to serve as the foundation for a new era of space diplomacy?
As I outlined in my previous article on The Dynamics of Nuclear Diplomacy, the answer to this strange set of anomalies is found in the rise of a new breed of misanthropic statecraft called “neo-Malthusianism” which took the levers of western foreign and internal economic policies over the dead bodies of pro-development leaders like Kennedy, Enrico Mattei, Dag Hammarskjold, Daniel Johnson Sr., Bobby Kennedy and Martin Luther King Jr. As the neo-Malthusian revolution was effected across western governments during this period, studies such as Limits To Growth began to promote a new wisdom of degrowth and conservation of ecosystems as a replacement for the “old wisdom” that cherished big infrastructure projects and scientific discovery as the driving ethic of humanity. “Ecosystems” under this new age of digital computer modelling were increasingly defined as closed, thermodynamic processes bounded by mathematical homeostasis, and humanity was expected to adapt to those supposed limits like any other beast within nature.
One of the founders of the Canadian branch of the Club of Rome was Maurice Lamontagne (former President of the Privy Council Office) who called out the problem of creativity itself in his 1968-1972 Science Policy Senate Reports:
“Nature imposes definite constraints on technology itself and if man persists in ignoring them the net effect of his action in the long run can be to reduce rather than to increase nature’s potential as a provider of resources and habitable space… But then, an obvious question arises: How can we stop man’s creativeness?”
Calling for a redirection of funding from science and discovery which had the troubling effect of increasing humanity’s power over nature and thus disrupting the mathematical equilibrium which Malthusian computer models demanded govern all reality, Lamontagne stated:
“The new wisdom prescribes that the additional R&D effort be devoted to the life sciences and social sciences rather than the physical sciences… to economic and social objectives rather than curiosity and discovery.”
The 1970s-1990s saw the largest onslaught on all domains of science policy that involved discoveries into the universe of the immeasurably large (space science) and immeasurably small (atomic science) which threatened to disrupt the formulas for population limits that the new breed of neo-Malthusian craved in their quest for total power under a New World Order.
In the next installment, we will review China’s re-activation of space exploration as a creative flanking maneuver to break humanity out of the rigged fixed rules of the Great Game while also reviving the dream of attaching our destiny to the infinite.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Matthew J.L. Ehret is a journalist, lecturer and founder of the Canadian Patriot Review. The author can be reached via his Substack account.
Notes
(1) Leavitt observed a correlation between the brightness and periodicity of pulsating stars which generated a system of triangulation of parallax that was used to determine relative distances of stars both within our own Milky Way and also other galaxies beyond.
(2) In his 1926 book ‘The Biosphere’, Vernadsky wrote: “The biosphere may be regarded as a region of transformers that convert cosmic radiations into active energy in electrical, chemical, mechanical, thermal, and other forms. Radiations from all stars enter the biosphere, but we catch and perceive only an insignificant part of the total. The existence of radiation originating in the most distant regions of the cosmos cannot be doubted. Stars and nebulae are constantly emitting specific radiations, and everything suggests that the penetrating radiation discovered in the upper regions of the atmosphere by Hess originates beyond the limits of the solar system, perhaps in the Milky Way, in nebulae, or in stars …The importance of this will not be clear for some time, but this penetrating cosmic radiation determines the character and mechanism of the biosphere.”
(3) Wernher von Braun stated at a 1966 NY Academy of Science conference: “The technology now available will enable us to accomplish the manned lunar landing in Project Apollo… For really serious manned exploration of the planets, however, to include manned landings, nuclear or electric propulsion will be required. And I would personally prefer a nuclear stage for a manned fly-by mission to Venus and Mars. And a manned Mars mission, which could be achieved by the mid-eighties, would very definitely require nuclear propulsion… The highly successful test firing program of the NERVA I engine lends confidence to the belief that a nuclear rocket stage can be designed.”
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
In an extraordinary interview last week, Dr. Peter McCullough, an American professor of Medicine and Vice Chief of Internal Medicine at Baylor University, declared that the world has been subjected to a form of bioterrorism, and that the suppression of early treatments for COVID-19—such as hydroxychloroquine— “was tightly linked to the development of a vaccine.”
Dr. McCullough made the explosive comments during a webinar on June 11, with Dr. Reiner Fuellmich, a German trial lawyer, who believes the pandemic was planned, and is “a crime against humanity.”
McCullough said he believes the bioterrorism has come in two stages—the first wave being the rollout of the coronavirus, and the second, the rollout of the dangerous vaccines, which he said may already be responsible for the deaths of up to 50,000 Americans.
“The first wave of the bioterrorism is a respiratory virus that spread across the world, and affected relatively few people—about one percent of many populations—but generated great fear,” McCullough explained during the Oval Media webinar with other doctors. He noted that the virus targeted “mostly the frail and the elderly, but for otherwise well people, it was much like having the common cold.”
Dr. McCullough later elaborated that he has treated many patients with the disease, written papers on it, had the disease himself, and has also seen a death in his own family due to COVID.
The doctor said he believes that fear of the virus was used very quickly to generate policies that would hugely impact human life, such as the draconian lockdowns.
“Every single thing that was done in public health in response to the pandemic made it worse,” he pointed out.
McCullough explained that early on, as a doctor treating COVID patients, he came up with an early treatment regimen for those struck with the virus, which reduced hospital stays by about 85 percent, and said he began publishing papers on what he had learned. The doctor noted that he was “met with resistance at all levels” in terms of actually treating patients and publishing his papers.
“Fortunately I had enough publication strength to publish the only two papers in the entire medical literature that teaches doctors how to treat COVID-19 patients at home to prevent hospitalization,” he said.
“What we have discovered is that the suppression of early treatment was tightly linked to the development of a vaccine, and the entire program—and in a sense, bioterrorism phase one— was rolled out, [and] was really about keeping the population in fear, and in isolation preparing them to accept the vaccine, which appears to be phase two of a bioterrorism operation.”
McCullough explained that both the coronavirus and the vaccines deliver “to the human body, the spike protein, [which is] the gain of function target of this bioterrorism research.”
He acknowledged that he couldn’t come out and say all that on national television because the medical establishment has done such a thorough job of propagandizing the issue.
“What we have learned over time is that we could no longer communicate with government agencies. We actually couldn’t communicate with our propagandized colleagues in major medical centers, all of which appear to be under a spell, almost as if they’ve been hypnotized.”
“Good doctors are doing unthinkable things like injecting biologically active messenger RNA that produces this pathogenic spike protein into pregnant women. I think when these doctors wake up from their trance, they’re going to be shocked to think what they’ve done to people,” he said, echoing what he, and Dr. Harvey Risch, professor at the Yale School of Public Health, told Fox News host Laura Ingraham during an interview last month.
McCullough told Fuellmich that last summer, he started an early treatment initiative to keep COVID patients out of the hospital, which involved organizing multiple groups of medical doctors in the United States and abroad. The doctor noted that some governments tried to block these doctors from providing the treatments, but with the help of the Association of Physicians and Surgeons, they were able to put out a home patient guide, and in the U.S., organized four different tele-medical services, and fifteen regional tele-medical services.
This way, people who were stricken with COVID-19, were able to call in to these services and get the medications they needed prescribed to local pharmacies, or mail order distribution pharmacies, he explained.
“Without the government really even understanding what was going on, we crushed the epidemic curve of the United States,” McCullough claimed. “Toward the end of December and January, we basically took care of the pandemic with about 500 doctors and telemedicine services, and to this day, we treat about 25 percent of the U.S. COVID-19 population that are actually at high risk, over age 50 with medical problems that present with severe symptoms.”
The doctor said that his belief that the suppression of early treatment was “tightly linked” to the vaccines, is what that led him to focus his attention on warning the public about the vaccines.
“We know that this is phase two of bioterrorism, we don’t know who’s behind it, but we know that they want a needle in every arm to inject messenger RNA, or adenoviral DNA into every human being,” he said. “They want every human being.” The doctor later warned that the experimental vaccines could ultimately lead to cancers, and sterilize young women.
Dr. McCullough said his goal is to set apart a large group of people that the system can not get to, which would include those who have already had the virus, those with immunity, children, pregnant women, and child-bearing women.
The cardiologist went on to say that because there is no clinical benefit in young people whatsoever to get the vaccine, even one case of myocarditis or pericarditis following the shots “is too many,” yet even though the CDC is aware of hundreds of alarming reports of cases of heart swelling in teenagers and young adults, they’re only going to reevaluate the matter later on in June. He accused the medical establishment of neglecting to to do anything to reduce the risks of the vaccines.
As someone who has chaired over two dozen vaccine safety monitoring boards for the FDA, and National Institute for Health, McCullough had room to criticize how the vaccines have been rolled out.
“With this program, there is no critical event committee, there is no data-safety monitoring board, and there’s no human ethics committee. Those structures are mandatory for all large clinical investigations, and so the word that’s really used for what’s going on is malfeasance, that’s wrongdoing of people in authority,” the doctor explained.
“Without any safety measures in place, you can see what’s going on,” he continued.
“Basically it’s the largest application of a biological product with the greatest amount of morbidity and mortality in the history of our country.”
“We are at over 5,000 deaths so far, as you know, and I think about 15,000 hospitalizations. In the EU it’s over 10,000 deaths. We are working with the Center for Medicaid (CMS) data, and we have a pretty good lead that the real number is tenfold.”
McCullough explained that because the Vaccine Adverse Event Reporting System (VAERS) database only amounts to about 10 percent of the bad reactions to the vaccines, his team has had to go to other sources for information.
“We have now a whistleblower inside the CMS, and we have two whistleblowers in the CDC,” the doctor revealed. “We think we have 50,000 dead Americans. Fifty thousand deaths. So we actually have more deaths due to the vaccine per day than certainly the viral illness by far. It’s basically propagandized bioterrorism by injection.”
Dr. McCullough said he’s seen people in his office with cases of portal vein thrombosis, myocarditis, and serious memory problems post-vaccination. “It’s so disconcerting,” he said.
He said he was recently viciously attacked in the media by a woman from Singapore who is linked to the Gates Foundation.
Dr. McCullough went on to express a chilling theory that the vaccines could have been designed to reduce the world’s population.
“If you said this is all a Gates Foundation program to reduce the population, it’s fitting very well with that hypothesis, right? The first wave was to kill the old people by the respiratory infection, the second wave is to take the survivors and target the young people and sterilize them,” he said.
“If you notice the messaging in the country, in the United States, they’re not even interested in old people now. They want the kids. They want the kids, kids, kids, kids kids! They’re such a focus on the kids,” he said, noting that in Toronto, Canada, last month, they lured the children with promises of ice-cream to get the jab. According to one report, the government of Ontario—which doesn’t require parental consent for children to get vaccinated—encouraged the kids to get the Pfizer vaccine at a pop-up vaccine event.
“They held the parents back, and they were vaccinating the kids,” the doctor railed. He said his Canadian wife’s mother was forcibly vaccinated against her will.
McCullough predicted that the United States is gearing up to force people into getting the injections.
“We have to stop it, and we have to see what’s behind it,” he concluded.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Debra Heine is a conservative Catholic mom of six and longtime political pundit. She has written for several conservative news websites over the years, including Breitbart and PJ Media.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Compiled by Gary G. Kohls, MD, Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG)
Many of these quotes are from: Vaccine Truth to which we remain indebted.
*
*
“No vaccine manufacturer shall be liable…for damages arising from a vaccine-related injury or death.” – President Ronald Reagan, signing the National Childhood Vaccine Injury Act (NCVIA) of 1986, absolving even the most greedy, most corrupt pharmaceutical corporation from all medico-legal liability when people die, are injured or are disabled from their vaccines
“…the NIH (National Institutes of Health) is incapable of conducting conflict-free research…it is clear that the system managing our vaccine program is corrupt beyond repair and needs a complete overhaul.” – Lori Mellwain, National Autism Association
“The media hacks (on ABC, NBC, CBS, CNBC, CNN, PBS, NPR, etc) who push the pro-vaccine propaganda and hide the truth (about the dangers of Big Pharma and Big Medicine’s over-vaccination and over-drugging agendas) are complicit in crimes against humanity…The entire vaccine machine is built on lies of omission and fraudulent science. Billions of dollars are quietly paid out by the National Vaccine Injury Compensation Program (NVICP) to vaccine-injured people, but the overwhelming majority of vaccine injuries are never reported (by physicians who profit from the agenda).” — William Christenson
“The CDC (and the NIAID, NIH, NIMH, AMA, AAP, AAFP, ABC, NBC, CBS, CNBC, CNN, PBS, NPR, etc, etc) takes funding from (the pharmaceutical) industry… It is outrageous that (the pharmaceutical) industry is apparently allowed to punish the CDC if the agency conducts research that has potential to cut into profits.” — Jerome R. Hoffman, MD – UCLA Professor of Medicine
“Fewer than 1% of vaccine adverse events are reported. The CDC’s entire vaccination propaganda campaign rests on their claim that side effects from vaccination are exceedingly rare, but according to the blatantly pro-over-vaccination, Big Pharma-funded CDC, in 2016 alone, VAERS received 59,117 vaccine adverse event reports. Among those reports were 432 vaccine-related deaths, 1,091 permanent vaccine-related disabilities, 4,132 vaccine-related hospitalizations, and 10,274 vaccine-related emergency room visits. What if these numbers actually represent less than 1% of the total as this report asserts? You multiply those numbers by 100.” – William Christenson
“For American kids born in 1986, only 12.8% had chronic diseases. That number has grown to 54% among the vaccine generation (those born after 1986) in lockstep with the CDC’s and AAP’s expanding vaccine schedule.” — Robert F. Kennedy, Jr –Children’s Health Defense
“Safety testing, which typically requires months and years for other medical products, often lasts only a few days with vaccines – not nearly long enough to spot cancers or chronic conditions like autoimmune diseases (e.g. juvenile diabetes, rheumatoid arthritis, multiple sclerosis), allergic illnesses (e.g. food allergies, allergic rhinitis, eczema, asthma), or neurological and neurodevelopmental injuries (e.g. ADD, ADHD, narcolepsy, epilepsy, seizure disorders, and autism). Vaccine manufacturer’s product inserts that accompany every vial of mandated vaccines include warnings about these and over 400 other injuries including many serious immune, neurological, and chronic illnesses for which FDA suspects that vaccines may be the cause.” – Robert F. Kennedy, Jr
“Many of these (childhood) illnesses became epidemic in American children after 1986, coterminous with the exploding vaccine schedule. For American kids born in 1986, only 12.8% had chronic diseases. That number has grown to 54% among the vaccine generation (those born after 1986) in lockstep with the expanding schedule.” – Robert F. Kennedy, Jr
“The children who comprise this vaccine-injured generation are now aging out of schools that needed to build quiet rooms and autism wings, install wobble chairs, hire security guards and hike special ed spending to 25% to accommodate them. They are landing on the social safety net which they threaten to sink. As Democratic lawmakers all around the nation vote to mandate more vaccines and call for the censorship of experts (including parents of vaccine-injured or killed children) that are expressing concerns about vaccine safety, Democratic Presidential candidates argue about how to fix America’s dysfunctional and unaffordable health care system without addressing the reality of the vaccine-related chronic disease and autoimmune disorder epidemic. The good news for Big Pharma, of course, is that many of these vaccine-injured children have lifelong dependencies on unaffordable blockbuster drugs like insulin, Adderall, anti-psychotic drugs, Epi-Pens, asthma inhalers, and diabetes, arthritis, and anti-seizure meds made by the same companies that made the vaccines.” – Robert F. Kennedy, Jr
“An overwhelming majority of the FDA officials directly charged with licensing vaccines, and the CDC officials who effectively mandate them for children, have personal financial entanglements with vaccine manufacturers. These ‘public servants’ are often shareholders in, grant recipients from, and/or paid consultants to vaccine manufacturers, and, occasionally, even patent holders of the very vaccines they vote to approve. Those conflicts of interest motivate them to recommend ever more vaccines with minimal support from evidence-based science” – Robert F. Kennedy, Jr.
“The FDA receives 45% of its annual budget from the pharmaceutical industry. The World Health Organization (WHO) gets roughly half its budget from private sources, including Pharma and its allied foundations. And the CDC, frankly, is a vaccine company; it owns 56 vaccine patents and buys and distributes $4.6 billion in vaccines annually through the Vaccines for Children program, which is over 40% of its total budget.” — Robert F. Kennedy, Jr
“The HHS (US Health and Human Services partners with vaccine makers to develop, approve, recommend, and pass mandates for new products and then shares profits from vaccine sales. HHS employees can personally collect up to $150,000 annually in royalties for products they work on. For example, key HHS officials collect money on every sale of Merck’s controversial HPV vaccine Gardasil, which also yields tens of millions annually for the agency in patent royalties.” — Robert F. Kennedy, Jr
“In 1986, Congress—awash in Pharma money (the pharmaceutical industry is number one for both political campaign contributions and lobbying spending on elected legislators over the past 20 years) enacted a law granting vaccine makers blanket immunity from liability for injuries caused by vaccines. The subsequent gold rush by pharmaceutical companies boosted the number of recommended inoculations from twelve shots of five vaccines in 1986 to 54 shots of 13 vaccines today. A billion-dollar sideline grew into the $50 billion vaccine industry behemoth.” — Robert F. Kennedy, Jr
“Since vaccines are liability-free – and effectively compulsory to a captive market of 76 million children – there is meager market incentive for companies to make them safe. The public must rely on the moral scruples of Merck, GlaxoSmithKline, Sanofi, and Pfizer. But these companies have a long history of operating recklessly and dishonestly, even with (the many drug) products for which they can be sued for injuries. The four companies that make virtually all of the recommended vaccines are all convicted felons. Collectively they have paid over $35 billion since 2009 for defrauding regulators, lying to and bribing government officials and physicians, falsifying science, and leaving a trail of (incurable chronic illnesses) injuries and deaths from products they knew to be dangerous and still sold under pretense of safety and efficacy.” – Robert F. Kennedy, Jr
“To physicians who know vaccines are causing harm and not reporting the adverse reactions, I say “shame on you”. Physicians who believe vaccines are completely safe and the worst that happens is a sore arm or slight fever, I say “do your research”. Speak with parents who, hours after their child received a vaccine, saw their child die or become comatose. If vaccines were not causing extensive harm, the pharmaceutical companies would never have to ask the government to pay for the damages that vaccines have caused and will continue to cause. Few parents begin hesitant about vaccines, but something happened that changed their minds about vaccines. A healthy child who suddenly starts seizing, becomes speechless, paralyzed, slips into a coma or dies(of SIDS) is validation to change minds about vaccines. … when a child (sickens or) dies hours after his well-baby check-up, this is not a coincidence.” — Sylvia H. Williams
“Parents of children who have been damaged by vaccines, have no reason to lie. Their lives and the lives of their children have been changed forever. Why does the CDC purchase (and promote) $4 billion in vaccines yearly? Research and scientists performing safety and efficacy vaccine studies should have no interest in the pharmaceutical industry or government agencies. Why have the number of Autism cases increased at the same time the vaccine schedule has increased? Why do vaccines contain neurotoxins such as mercury, aluminum, and other ingredients such as formaldehyde and animal DNA? … Why has there never been a study of vaccinated versus unvaccinated children? Ethically, this study can be performed with the number of unvaccinated children in the United States and those who are fully vaccinated. A doctor’s FIRST commitment in his practice is … to “first do no harm”. — Sylvia H. Williams
“…even the ideal influenza vaccine, matched perfectly to circulating strains of wild influenza and capable of stopping all influenza viruses, can only deal with a small part of the ‘flu’ problem because most ‘flu’ appears to have nothing to do with influenza. Every year, hundreds of thousands of respiratory specimens are tested across the US. Of those tested, on average 16% are found to be influenza positive.” – Dr Peter Doshi (from a British Medical Journal review article, “Influenza: marketing vaccines by marketing disease” 2013 (BMJ 2013; 346:f3037)
“…It’s no wonder so many people feel that ‘flu shots’ don’t work: for most flus, they can’t work because most diagnosed cases of the flu aren’t the flu… The CDC says that 30,000 – 60,000 people die from the flu every year in the US. But actually, it’s closer to 20 people (because “pneumonia of all causes “are inexplicably included in the “influenza” category). However, we can’t admit that, because if we did, we’d be exposing our gigantic PsyOp. The whole campaign to scare people into getting a flu shot (or a Coronavirus shot – Ed) would have about the same effect as warning people to carry iron umbrellas, in case toasters fall out of upper-story windows…and, by the way, we’d all be put in prison for fraud.” – Jon Rappoport, investigative reporter
“Aluminum and mercury (in their well-child vaccines) are often simultaneously administered to infants…However, there is absolutely no data, including animal data, about the potential for synergy, additivity, or antagonism, all of which can occur in binary metal mixtures that relate and allow us to draw any conclusions from the simultaneous exposure to these two salts in vaccines.” — Walt Ornstein (testifying at the Global Vaccine Safety Summit 2019
“Alzheimer’s Disease is a human form of chronic aluminum neurotoxicity.” – JR Walton, PhD – University of New South Wales, Sydney, Australia
“in relationship to aluminum (in vaccines), being a nephrologist for a long time, is the potential for aluminum and central nervous system toxicity was well established by dialysis data. To think there isn’t some possible problem here is unreal.” — Dr. Weil (Pediatrician ..testifying at the CDC’s infamous Simpsonwood conference – 2000)
“…The increased incidence of neurobehavioral problems in (fully-vaccinated) children in the past few decades is probably real…I work in the school system where my effort is entirely in special education and I have to say that the number of kids getting help in special education is growing nationally and state by state at a rate we have not seen before. So there is some kind of an increase. We can argue about what it is due to…But there are certainly more kids with ADD and there are more kids with speech and language disorders than there have been in the past.” – Dr Weil
“As we add adjuvants (to vaccines, like aluminum), the primary concern, is (delayed) systemic adverse events rather than local adverse events. … The major health concerns which we are seeing are long-term (adverse) effects.” — Martin Howell Friede, Coordinator, Initiative for Vaccine Research, WHO (testifying at the WHO Global Vaccine Safety Summit)
“Hepatitis B vaccination has been performed in the national immunization programmes within the last 30 years and is mandatory for newborns and children, especially in developing countries. … hepatitis B vaccination may lead to many demyelinating diseases, such as multiple sclerosis, Guillain-Barré syndrome, and acute transverse myelitis. Postvaccination ADEM(Acute Disseminated Encephalomyelitis). ADEM has been associated with several vaccines such as rabies, diphtheria-tetanus-polio, smallpox, measles, mumps, rubella, Japanese B encephalitis, pertussis, influenza, hepatitis B…. One crucial theory was the “molecular mimicry” hypothesis, which was described as an autoimmune reaction caused by a host receiving an antigen that has amino acid homology with amino acid chains in organs of the host’s body … the hypothesis of “molecular mimicry” may be the key pathogenic factors leading to ADEM.” See this.
Editor’s Note: (It is worth pointing out at this point that molecular mimicry is generally accepted as a mechanism by which vaccines can trigger serious, often permanent an impossible to cure, autoimmune diseases in vaccinated individuals. One good example is juvenile, insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus in vaccinated children, in which the tissue in the child’s insulin-producing pancreatic, insulin-secreting Beta cells is attacked and damaged/destroyed by the antibodies that were produced when an aluminum-containing, vaccine was injected into a child’s then-needle-damaged muscle/vascular/collagen/platelet tissue which then developed unintended antibodies against tissue other than that which was included in the vaccine.)
”Inactivated vaccines like DPT contain the neurotoxin aluminum!! This vaccine adjuvant is causing huge problems in the developed world, especially in vaccines such as Gardasil, which has the highest levels of aluminum of any vaccine. But research into its toxic effects is being suppressed. Professor Chris Exley, who is the World Expert on aluminum toxicity in living organisms. He has found … the link between aluminum adjuvants and autism, MS (multiple sclerosis), CFS (chronic fatigue syndrome), Alzheimer’s dementia and other chronic conditions. Exley’s research funding has dried up. ‘They’ don’t want you to know that aluminum is harmful and has never been tested for safety.” – Angio Svizzera
“Our very great concern is that children worldwide are being exposed to un-recognised toxic chemicals that are silently eroding intelligence, disrupting behaviours, truncating future achievements, and damaging societies, perhaps most seriously in developing countries.” – Philippe Grandjean, MD, MPH
“Circulating immune complexes can result from either 1) normal responses to infection, 2) tissue injury or 3) artificial responses to vaccination. The fact that vaccines are designed to hyper-stimulate antibody production (thus producing much higher antibody levels than what occurs following natural infection), suggests that vaccination may carry a much higher risk for immune vasculopathies (and other autoimmune disorders).” – Dr Lucija Tomljenovic
“Vaccine-induced cerebral vasculitis is a serious disease which typically results in fatal outcomes when undiagnosed and left untreated. The fact that many of the symptoms reported to vaccine safety surveillance databases following HPV vaccination are indicative of cerebral vasculitis, but are unrecognized as such (i.e., intense persistent migraines, syncope, seizures, tremors and tingling, myalgia, locomotor abnormalities, psychotic symptoms and cognitive deficits), is a serious concern.” – Dr Tomljenovic
“HPV vaccines (including Merck’s Gardasil and GSK’s Cervarix) pose an inherent risk for triggering potentially fatal autoimmune vasculopathies and are therefore inherently unsafe for some individuals. Exactly which individuals might be more prone to developing a serious adverse drug reaction (ADR) following HPV vaccination is currently unknown. It is also unknown whether HPV vaccination can actually prevent cervical cancer cases since the current optimistic extrapolations have not been validated.” – Dr Tomljenovic
“The only safe vaccine is one that is never used.” — Dr James A. Shannon, NIH (National Institutes of Health)
“No batch of vaccines can be proven safe before it is given to children (in mass vaccination programs in pediatric clinics).” – Dr Leonard Scheele, Surgeon General of the United States, addressing an AMA convention in 1955
“The evidence for indicting immunizations for SIDS (Sudden Infant Death Syndrome) is … compelling. However, the(pro-vaccine) keepers of the keys to medical-research funds are not interested in searching this very important lead to the cause of an ongoing, and possibly preventable, tragedy. Anything that implies that immunizations are not the greatest medical advance in the history of public health is ignored or ridiculed. Can you imagine the economic and political import of discovering that immunzations are killing thousands of babies?” — Dr William C. Douglass, MD (Honored twice as America’s ‘Doctor of the Year’)
“Only after realising that routine immunisations were dangerous did I achieve a substantial drop in infant death rates. The worst vaccine of all is the whooping cough vaccine ….it is responsible for a lot of deaths and for a lot of infants suffering irreversible brain damage. In susceptible infants, it knocks their immune systems about, leading to irreparable brain damage, or severe attacks or even deaths from diseases like pneumonia or gastro-enteritis and so on.” — Dr Kalokerinos
“Sudden Infant Death Syndrome (SIDS) has been reported following the administration of DPT. The significance is unclear. 85% of SIDS cases occur in the period 1 through 6 months of age, with the peak incidence at age 2 to 4 months.” (Quote directly from the accompanying insert to Connaught Labs DPT vaccine.) — Jane Orient, MD, executive director of the Association of American Physicians and Surgeons (AAPS)
“Official data shows that large scale vaccination has failed to obtain any significant improvement of the diseases against which they were supposed to provide protection.” — Dr Sabin, developer of Polio vaccine
“The greatest threat of childhood diseases lies in the dangerous and ineffectual efforts made to prevent them through mass immunization…There is no convincing scientific evidence that mass inoculations can be credited with eliminating any childhood disease.” — Dr Robert Mendelsohn, MD
“It is pathetic and incredulous to say we ever vanquished smallpox with vaccines, when only 10% of the world’s population was ever vaccinated.” — Dr Glen Dettman
“The great doctors of the world know the medical theory of immunization and contagious diseases is as false as false can be. But they dare not speak out; and, as long as the practice makes money for those who sponsor it and people can be persuaded to believe in it, there will be no change…The decline in infectious diseases in developed countries had nothing to do with vaccinations, but with the decline in (unhealthy water and food) poverty and malnutrition.” — Gerhard Buchwald, MD
“I was working in one of the oldest lung illness treatment centres in Germany, and just by chance, I looked at the files of those people who had fallen ill during the first German epidemic of smallpox (in 1947) … We had always been told that the smallpox vaccinations would protect against smallpox. And now I could verify, thanks to the files and papers, that all of those who had fallen ill had been vaccinated. This was very upsetting for me.” — Gerhard Buchwald, MD
“There is a great deal of evidence to prove that immunization of children does more harm than good.” – Dr J. Anthony Morris (formerly Chief Vaccine Control Officer at the US FDA)
“There is insufficient evidence to support routine vaccination of healthy persons of any age.” — Paul Frame, MD, Journal of Family Practice
“I think that no person would permit anybody to get close to them with an inoculation if they would really know how they are made, what they carry, the lies told about them and what the real percent of danger is of contracting such a disease which is minimal.” — Dr Eva Snead
“There has been a frightening increase in cases of autism that has not been explained. There are a number of anecdotal reports from parents that symptoms of autism have appeared close to the time of the (MMR) vaccine.” — Jane Orient, MD
“I once believed in Jenner; I once believed in Pasteur. I once believed in vaccination. I once believed in vivisection. But I changed my views as the result of hard thinking.” — Dr Hadwen
“If you want the truth on vaccination you must go to those who are not (benefitting financially from it). If doctors shot at the moon every time it was full as a preventive of measles and got a shilling for it, they would bring statistics to prove it was a most efficient practice, and that the population would be decimated if it were stopped.” — Dr Allinson
“The greatest threat of childhood diseases lies in the dangerous and ineffectual efforts made to prevent them through mass immunization…There is no convincing scientific evidence that mass inoculations can be credited with eliminating any childhood disease.” — Dr Robert Mendelsohn, MD
“Live virus inoculations can actually cause a recently-vaccinated patient to shed the infectious vaccine viruses. The viral shedding is known to last for months in some cases. Therefore, the recently vaccinated individual can actually be contagious to close contacts. Post-vaccination contagion has been proven to occur following measles, mumps, chicken pox, oral polio and the new shingles vaccines. There are no commonly available tests to determine which recently vaccinated patients are shedding live vaccine viruses. Therefore, recently vaccinated persons are obviously far more likely to be contagious than are the asymptomatic, non-vaccinated children that are so irrationally feared, banned from attending public schools and often forced to be vaccinated against their wills.” — Gary G. Kohls, MD
48 Highly Vaccinology-literate Doctors, Uncontaminated by Big Pharma Money – and Therefore Banned by ALL Big Pharma-controlled Mainstream Media Outlets – Who Can Explain Clearly Why No Vaccine is EITHER Safe or Effective Long-Term
The Following are links to video productions featuring the following scientists and medical doctors.
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Dr Gary G. Kohls lives in the USA and writes articles that deal with the dangers of fascism, corporatism, totalitarianism, militarism, racism, malnutrition, and Big Pharma’s over-drugging and over-vaccinating agendas. In addition, his columns deal with cultural movements that threaten democracy, war, civility, health, freedom, the future of the children and the sustainability and livability of the planet.
His Duty to Warn columns have been re-published around the world for the last decade. Dr Kohls frequently writes about Big Vaccine’s over-vaccination agendas and Big Medicine’s over-screening, over-diagnosing and over-treating agendas.
He is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization.
Many of Dr Kohls’ columns have been archived at a number of websites, including:
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
In July 2021, South Africa was swept by the largest wave of violence seen since the fall of apartheid in 1994. The protests that began on July 8 have quickly turned into pogroms that involved thousands of people.
The nominal cause for the outbreak of riots was the arrest of a former President of South Africa Jacob Zuma on charges of corruption. Mr. Zuma’s controversial activities have long raised questions.
After the fall of apartheid he acquired senior positions under Mandela’s administration. In that period, he was involved in an international scandal on a suspicious arms deal when Pretoria reportedly purchased warships and aircraft from European suppliers at exorbitant prices.
Despite all allegations, he became president in 2009, replacing the notorious Thabo Mbeki. New “Charming” president was handing over big chunks of the country’s economy to his Indian friends, the Gupta brothers, who were ‘at the heart of a long-running process of corruption in South Africa,’ according to the British Foreign Office.
First, Zuma was accused of corruption back in 2009. Then the case was postponed after he entered presidential office, but the disputes did not stop. In 2018, he had to resign, and legal procedures were resumed, new corruption charges were brought. The trial lasted for 3 years, until the summer of 2021, when Zuma defiantly refused to testify in the case of “seizure of power” and corruption. On June 29, he was found guilty of contempt of court, sentenced to 15 months in prison and ordered to surrender to the authorities before midnight on July 7, which he did at the very last moment. That same night, his supporters organized rallies, proclaiming Zuma a “prisoner of conscience”. A political crisis broke out.
The events came thick and fast amid a lasting economic crisis in the country. According to various estimates, the last years of Jacob Zuma’s presidency were marked with sharp drops in the economy. Ineffective administrative measures, populism and ineffectiveness of the health care system during the coronavirus pademic have dramatically aggravated the situation in the country. Just in 2020, the RSA’s economy shrank by 7%, and the number of citizens living below the poverty line increased by 2 million people.
“In 1994 the ANC inherited the strongest economy in Africa, with excellent infrastructure, including cheap, reliable electricity. The ANC has wrecked it all. We have continual blackouts; the passenger railways are crumbling into ruin; most of the municipalities are dysfunctional, with appalling water supply and sewage running in the streets; South African Airways is bankrupt; the economy is crippled; deep poverty is widespread, and unemployment is at 43 per cent (including many who have given up looking for work). This tragedy has been caused by systematic corruption, a bloated government, ruinous racial laws and a relentless assault on private enterprise.” – Andrew Kenny wrote in The Spectator.
It is no surprise that the protest has quickly engulfed a significant part of the poor black population in South Africa. The majority of those who finally took to the street were indifferent to the fate of Jacob Zuma itself. His arrest turned out to be a trigger of protest against hopeless poverty, the discrepancy between beautiful images on Sat TV and the reality on the streets. The protests instantly turned into a violent riot, “senseless and merciless,” as one of the classics of literature wrote.
The protesters, mostly black from the suburbs, staged mass pogroms. Thousands of shops, including big, white-owned supermarkets and small, uninsured, black-owned stores were destroyed. The rioters took the loot in carts from grocery, tech, furniture and luxury shops. Only bookshops seemed to had escaped the looters, as eyewitnesses noted.
Amid the general chaos, a spate of criminal activities was also detected. The gangs were replenished with newcomers. This led to robbing of civilian properties, and not only of the rich, but generally of white citizens. Shootings were regularly heard on the streets.
During the two weeks of the pogroms, the death toll exceeded 300 casualties, more than 2000 people were detained. The riots resulted in losses estimated at hundreds of millions of dollars. The country was facing the risk of food and fuel shortage. International transport companies now recommend cargo ships to avoid calling at the ports of South Africa.
On July 15, the South African government had to deploy more than 20,000 troops to assist police in quelling the riots.
The main ‘battlefields’ were the provinces of Gauteng, in which the metropolis of Johannesburg is located, and the region of KwaZulu-Natal. If the second is one of the poorest areas of the country, then Gauteng is the most prosperous one, because a big part of the rich white population of the country lives here.
On July 29, KwaZulu-Natal became the first province to declare a state of emergency.
“Direct losses and losses caused to the province’s infrastructure and business reach 1.5 billion rand ($108 million),” the prime minister said. “As a result, it was decided to declare a state of disaster in the province in order to redirect budget funds and gain access to new funds.” Sihle Zikalala noted that the proclaimed amount of damage is not a final one and may significantly increase.
The reasons for such bitterness and rage of the protesters are hidden deeper than the economic crisis and the arrest of the former president.
The current violence is a logical consequence of the physical, economic and cultural oppression of the white population in the country, which has been gaining strength for the past 20 years. The white citizens of South Africa have been consistently exposed as the perpetrators of social injustice for decades. The image of the “internal enemy”, guilty of all the troubles of the black majority, has been actively cultivated. This phenomenon has long gained a public character and has even became a kind of a “good manner”,” fashion”, both for the political elite and among the black population.
The reason why the situation in South Africa went out of control in 2021 is that internal political processes in RSA have resonated with modern global cultural and the ideological split between so-called conservatives and progressists. This split has objective reasons, primarily socio-economic ones, namely the systemic crisis of modern capitalism and, as a result, the desire of global elites to retain and strengthen their power in the new emerging reality.
Ironically, both opposing camps use slogans of social justice and equality of opportunities. In fact, actions of the so-called progressists often lead to greater segregation that is based on national, racial, religious or cultural principles. This process is now affecting more and more social spheres, including those of culture and economy; it determines national processes, international relations and law.
Due to its history, South Africa can be considered a litmus test of such processes within the global dimension. There, the concept of white supremacism was implemented in its very essential form, which led to two different vectors of the state’s development and it planted a ticking bomb in the country’s political system, predicting an inevitable collapse of the “social contract”.
On the one hand, the white wealthy educated minority arranged the RSA’s economy, such that the country’s development reached the 1st place in Africa and leading positions in world rankings. On the other hand, the same minority organized social processes in the state in such a way that the black majority was not only limited in their rights, but in fact, faced their liberties reduced to the same level that peasants had in the Early Middle Ages in Europe.
As a result, such an environment was fertile for the spread of pro-communist ideology in the country. Taking into account the low level of education of the RSA’s electorate, the communist ideas took a bizarre shape and, in fact, turned into an ideology of racial anarchism, an ideology that justifies idleness on a racial basis, often explaining it with a compensation for many years of “exploitation of the indigenous population by alien white invaders.”
This mix of contradictions was doomed to explode. It was a ticking bomb, the fuse of which ignited in the early 2000s.
Local experts and journalists have been sounding the alarm for a long time, defining the social developments as a catastrophe; but their opinion was of little interest to the world community fascinated by the global neoliberal agenda.
Back in 2010, Dr. Dan Roodt, a supporter for Afrikaners (mainly descendants from Dutch settlers), Anglo-Africans (descendants from colonists from the British Empire) and other groups of RSA’s white population, claimed that since the end of apartheid, more than fifty thousand white citizens had been killed, over two hundred thousand women had been raped.
From 1997 to 2007, 1,248 white local farmers were killed. According to the Afrikaner Resistance Movement, more than 3,000 farmers were killed by 2010, which is, on average, one dead white farmer per day.
The social structure of the country has changed dramatically. The white minority faced all sorts of artificial barriers in business and social sphere, while numerous state programs were aimed to support the black majority. As a result, even the law enforcement bodies preferred to leave positions vacant for blacks, instead of appointing specialists according to their competencies, and not by the racial principle.
Today, there is a sharp decline in the income of the white population of the country.
The split also affected the culture of the nation. For example, not so long ago, a song with an open call to kill white farmers (Boers) became very popular in South Africa. Immediately after its ban, the leader of the white conservatists, Eugene Terblanche, was killed, which his supporters linked to the political interests of the ruling African National Congress (ANC).
The situation was consistently worsening. Each new round of the crisis, whether it concerned racial, economic or cultural differences, was more dangerous than the previous one.
The current political contradictions within the ANC served as a trigger for the escalation. However, Summer 2021 Pogroms seem to be an absolutely new phenomenon that can serve as a harbinger of a fully-fledged civil war. In this hot conflict, the remnants of the white population are doomed to defeat, and the winners would get a destroyed economy and the country that would roll back for many decades.
Amid neoliberal propaganda promoted by Euro-Atlantic elites, the “conservatives” from South Africa have no chance of getting any support from the international community. Being white, Afro-British, devout Christians and often right-wing conservatives, they are doomed to become victims of international double standards. Indeed, any of their characteristics mentioned above does not fit into the political and ideological agenda of Washington and Brussels.
However, the global balance of forces is changing.
Both the United States and Western Europe are losing their positions on the international arena and are no longer the only decision makers to determine the vector of global development.
China, India, South Korea, Russia, Malaysia, Indonesia, and other countries are interested in developing cooperation with South Africa, which means they want to see its political stability. This is especially relevant on the eve of the expected tectonic shifts in the structure of the world system of international relations. Such an approach should determine the real allies and well-wishers of South Africa.
South Korea and South Africa seek for strengthening horizontal economic ties, for example, in the field of shipbuilding and sea cargo logistic. South Africa features as Korea’s largest trading partner in Africa while Korea is South Africa’s fourth largest trading partner in Asia. The positions of both countries on the world stage are similar, and largely depend on their similar geographical location.
If Seoul is primarily interested in developing economic ties with Pretoria, then China has broader, geopolitical interests in South Africa. In addition to economic cooperation, caused by Beijing’s intention to get technologies and inlarge industrial potential in the region, it is also guided by the strategic need to enter and strengthen its position in South Africa. RSA could become an important foothold in case of a confrontation with the United States.
“China is highly concerned about the latest development in South Africa. We support the South African government’s effort to stop violence and chaos, and believe that under the leadership of President Ramaphosa, it will restore social order and economic stability at an early date. Some Chinese nationals have suffered severe property damage and their life and safety have been seriously threatened. We express concern over that and have asked relevant departments of the South African government to step up protection of Chinese nationals and companies in the country. The South African side has promised that they will ramp up efforts to protect the property and safety of Chinese nationals in South Africa.”- comment of the Chinese Foreign Ministry.
In its turn, India is a regional competitor of China and has similar motives, including maintaining the stability of the southern logistics maritime corridor, which runs off the coast of South Africa.
Russia does not have core strategic interests in South Africa, but Moscow also stands for preserving the stability of the region as a condition for the development of world trade, since once format of BRIC was expanded to BRICS.
“We hope that the consistent steps being taken by the South African authorities will help them to normalise the situation and bring it back to the constitutional ambit”. – Spokesperson of the Russian Foreign Ministry commented on the riots in South Africa.
On the other side, apparently, there are interests of the United States and its satellites. The destabilization of the situation in South Africa is considered by the world banking capital as an opportunity to get a free space for new speculative operations and profit from the redistribution of property in the country gripped by an internal political crisis.
At the same time, the violent riots in South Africa should be another red flag for Washington. In fact, racial and ethnic contradictions in the United States are of the same nature as the processes that have been gaining momentum in South Africa in recent years. The difference is that the social system in the U.S. is much larger and more complex than that in South Africa, so the social developments may be of a slightly different dynamics.
In the U.S., it takes more time to accumulate a critical mass of contradictions, as well as a trigger mechanism of a different nature is required over there. Most importantly, it requires an irretrievable loss of trust in a just society. It requires a loss of faith in the American dream and a deep awareness of deception by at least every second American. If this happens, then developments in the United States will follow the South African scenario, but in a much more reactive manner. The multicultural and pseudo-tolerant Washington establishment should be prepared that what they are now observing in South Africa should be expected in their country already by the 2030s.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
The world’s first nuclear explosion occurred on July 16, 1945, when a plutonium implosion device was tested at a site located 210 miles south of Los Alamos, New Mexico, on the barren plains of the Alamogordo Bombing Range, known as the Jornada del Muerto (day of the dead).
The PCR test is an outrageous fraud that was never meant to detect a virus. The main goal of this pandemic fraud was to vaccinate the entire world and that seems to be working out quite well for these evil globalist criminals.
Numerous films, some of them based on novels, feature nuclear war, its potential impacts, and the extreme threat these weapons pose. One of the first was Godzilla, a 1954 Japanese production re-released in the US two years later with Raymond Burr in a key role.
First identified last year in India, the SARS-CoV-2 Delta variant was “thought to have driven the deadly second wave of infections this summer in India”. According to so-called “scientific opinion” it is now said to be spreading worldwide, to some 80 countries.
This week, on the Global Research News Hour, we invite the listeners to attend a panel discussion talking about the movie Haiti Betrayed. They will discuss the various military, economic and other ways the U.S. and Canada and other major powers are continuing to benefit from the misery of the people.
Too many people believe the Disney version of what’s happening in Syria — gallant America riding a white horse to save the poor children of Syria from a brutal dictator.
Now that we’re more than a year into the pandemic, it’s crystal clear that the panic that ensued was unnecessary and the draconian measures put into place for public health were unwarranted and harmful.
The group emphasizes the voluntary nature of this medical treatment as well as the need for informed consent and individual risk-benefit assessment. They reject the pressure exerted by public health officials, the news and social media, and fellow citizens.
Patrick King has been trending on twitter due to a viral video where it is claimed that the province of Alberta rolled back on their lockdown measures as a result of Patrick’s court proceedings and this is not true as Patrick states. I Wasn’t Successful, No I did Not Win The Court Case”.
Glen Ford, the outspoken Black Liberator and opponent of U.S. aggression from America’s streets to the devastated nations in the Global South, finally breathed his last on the morning of July 28, 2021. He was 71.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
“Our so-called foreign aid program, which is not really foreign aid because it isn’t aid to foreigners but aid to us, is an indispensable factor in carrying out our foreign policy.” (US Secretary of State John Foster Dulles, 1956(1))
Over the last fifty years, rich countries claim that they have given over $2 trillion in aid to poor countries. Despite this, many people in poor countries still live in poverty. This has led to some commentators suggesting that aid is pointless. However, the figure of $2 trillion is misleading. A closer look at government aid reveals that not only is the total spending quite small, but very little of it is genuinely used for development. The poorest people receive very little.(2) Government aid from Britain and the US actually has other purposes. It is primarily a tool to help governments pursue their foreign policies. It benefits our exporters, it cements relationships with leaders in other countries, and it can be used to persuade other countries to change their economic systems.
The Ultimate Example of Aid Propaganda – The Marshall Plan
After World War 2, the US came up with a system of aid called the Marshall Plan. This was to help re-build Europe and is often used by the mainsteam media as an example of America’s generosity. In fact, the primary focus of the Marshall Plan was to help US companies develop markets abroad so they could export more.(3)At the time, US exporters faced a possible crisis because European countries had no money. The US under-secretary of state for economic affairs justified foreign aid when he wrote in 1947:
“Let us admit right off, we need markets, big markets, in which to buy and sell.”(4)
Various documents from the time show that US aid was intended to help with US security or ‘geopolitical interests’. In other words, control of resources and trade.(5) Early loans to Europe were for imports from America, particularly oil and food.
These arrangements had serious downsides for some countries that produced goods which competed with American exports. America dominated the global grain trade by 1950 whilst Argentina’s grain trade was reduced by two-thirds.(6) The whole system had the intended effect of turning other countries into customers of the US.
The Marshall plan also had a second purpose. Some of the Marshall Plan funds were secretly sent to anti-communist groups because the US government wanted to make sure that communist governments did not come to power in Europe after the war.(7)
Phantom Aid – Destroy and Re-build
Most US citizens believe that their government is one of the most generous, when in fact it is the least generous of all advanced nations. Britain does slightly better but is well behind the leading European nations. In 1970 most advanced nations agreed to pay a certain amount of their annual production (0.7% of their GNP) as aid. Currently, only Norway, Sweden, Denmark and Luxembourg do this.(8) The total shortfall so far is estimated to be over $3 trillion. This would be enough to pay off all of the developing world’s outstanding debts, whilst simultaneously providing basic healthcare and education for everyone.
The amount of aid given each year by all rich countries in 2019 is $150 billion. This sounds like a lot, but is much smaller than the $1.8 trillion dollars spent on weapons each year, or the hundreds of billions of dollars spent subsidising big corporations. The US spends 25 times as much on its military as on aid. Britain also spends much more on weapons than on aid.(9) At the same time, huge amounts of wealth are extracted from poor countries by rich ones. Recent calculations show that for every dollar that poor countries receive in aid, $24 dollars flows from poor countries to rich.(10)
Over the years, rich countries have changed what they define as aid. They now include things that were not originally counted. Writing off debt now counts as aid.(11) Even reconstruction in Iraq and Afghanistan counts as aid. The US has a ‘destroy and rebuild’ aid strategy. First they bomb the schools, hospitals, roads and other infrastructure in a country that they are invading. When they rebuild some of it, they call this aid.(12) Britain participates in this system.
Approximately a quarter of aid goes on ‘technical assistance’. This is where overpaid consultants from rich countries advise poor countries. In Cambodia $50 million was spent on 700 international consultants. The same money could have paid for thousands of jobs for Cambodians.(13) Politicians also now include debt relief as aid. Much of this aid has been described as phantom aid.
Military Aid
A third of US aid is for ‘security’, which means it is spent on weapons and military training, usually provided by US companies.(14) This was the case for Britain up until 2014, but UK military aid has been less in recent years (although this is likely to change).(15)
In earlier studies, researchers found that much US aid went to South American governments that tortured their citizens, such as Columbia.(16) These were the same rulers that the US wanted to keep in power because they allowed US corporations to plunder the resources of their countries.
Rich Countries Benefit More Than Poor Countries
Foreign aid strengthens the commercial and political links between decision-makers in rich countries and decision-makers in the developing world. This then encourages those developing countries to trade with the donor countries. There was a famous example in Britain known as the Pergau Dam scandal in 1991. British aid to build an unnecessary dam in Malaysia turned out to be a bribe to encourage the Malaysian government to buy British weapons and provide work for British construction companies.(17) Even the economist magazine noted that:
“Margaret Thatcher’s government used aid to help British companies, with recipients encouraged to buy Leyland buses and Westland helicopters.”(18)
The people who benefit most from the aid system are the consultants and corporations from rich countries, together with decision-makers in poor countries.
Even food aid is not a simple case of helping those in need. It can be detrimental to local economies. US relief agencies in Somalia in 1992 had been given some funding by the US government. The agencies were told that they had to buy food from the US. This food was then distributed by the agencies in Somalia. The agencies were not allowed to buy from local farmers. At the same time the local farmers were unable to sell anything, as they were unable to compete against free food from the aid agencies. This led to many of them going out of business. The local people were then dependent on the food from the US, as there were no local producers. Over the longer term they had become customers of US food companies. In 1997 the US government agency in charge of aid said:
“The principal beneficiary of America’s foreign assistance has always been the United States. . . . Foreign assistance programs have helped the United States by creating major markets for agricultural goods.”(19)
The charity organization CARE announced in 2007 that it will no longer take food aid from the US government, as the system is motivated by profit, not altruism, and ends up causing hunger, rather than reducing it.(20)
Aid comes with strings attached
Much aid comes with conditions attached that are intended to benefit the donors, not the recipients. In many cases, the economic changes have severe consequences for poor people. For example, aid money intended for medicines could be used to provide large quantities of cheap, but effective, medicines. Instead, donors insist that it is spent on expensive, patented medicines that are no more effective. In one of the worst examples, poor countries were paying $15,000 for patent medicines to treat AIDS instead of $350 for generic copies. This creates big profits for Western drug companies. At one point over half of British aid programs were tied to the purchase of British goods,(21) and more than 70% of US aid goes back to the US. The same is true of many other rich countries. Much aid from Japan and France comes with the condition that it is spent on Japanese or French purchases.
The threat of holding back aid is also used for coercion. For example, US aid to Brazil was conditional upon Brazil strengthening its patent laws. Some aid comes with much broader strings attached. The overall effect is intended to change the economic system within poor countries to benefit Western companies. In 1993, the British Minister for Overseas development stated:
“We use the aid program to support the kind of international economic system which serves our interest.”(22)
What’s Left Over?
If we exclude military aid, reconstruction aid to countries that we have destroyed, and other phantom aid, there is not much left. One study of British aid by the UN concluded that only 6% was spent on helping the poor.(23) The economist Jeffrey Sachs calculated that:
“In 2002, the United States gave $3 per person in sub-Saharan Africa. Taking out the parts for US consultants, food and other emergency aid, administrative costs, and debt relief, the aid per person came to the grand total of 6 cents.”(24)
This small proportion of aid is genuinely useful, and the successes of deworming drugs, oral rehydration for diarrheal diseases, and indoor spraying to control malaria, show that a great deal can be achieved with very little money when rich countries are really trying to help the poor. Unfortunately, politicians from donor countries use these examples as propaganda to give a misleading impression about the true nature of aid. The poorest countries should be receiving the most, but they only receive approximately a quarter of all government aid.
Mainstream media coverage of aid is also a good example of successful propaganda. It is assumed without question that aid is intended to help the poor. The true purposes of aid are rarely mentioned. This propaganda plays a deeper role. Rich countries that devote immense resources to stealing from poor countries are able to whitewash reality, and give the impression that they are trying to save the world.
Rich Countries Extract Wealth From Poor Countries
Aid could make a significant contribution to decreasing poverty, if all of it were used well. Coordinated efforts to deal with diseases in poor countries, such as malaria, could make a big difference to the lives of hundreds of millions of people. Unfortunately, as we saw in earlier posts, poor countries send $2trillion/year more to rich countries than they receive.(25) Most US and UK policies are intended to extract wealth from poor countries, through tax havens, debt, exploitation, war, and plunder. Leading analysts recently said:
“aid resources are…often misdirected. They are increasingly being deployed in ways that exacerbate rather than eradicate poverty.”(26)
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Rod Driver is a part-time academic who is particularly interested in de-bunking modern-day US and British propaganda, and explaining war, terrorism, economics and poverty, without the nonsense in the mainstream media. This article was first posted at medium.com/elephantsintheroom
Notes
1) John Foster Dulles, cited in Mark Curtis, The Great Deception, p.85
16) Lars Schoultz, Comparative Politics, 1981, cited in Noam Chomsky, Introduction to Juan Pablo Ordonez, No Human Being is Disposable, 1995, at https://chomsky.info/1995____/
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
On July 28th, North Texas’ Baylor Scott and White Healthcare system announced that all employees and volunteers must be fully vaccinated with the Covid-19 shot by October 1. Also on that day they sued Dr. Peter McCullough, a member of the Department of Medicine and Division of Cardiology at Baylor University Medical Center and Baylor Heart and Vascular Institute.
The lawsuit alleges Dr. McCullough violated his separation agreement by using the Baylor Scott and White Health System name during media appearances. As the national crisis has drawn on, Dr. McCullough has been a public voice of data-driven reason in the media, delivering concise scientific interpretation of the available science, and providing a focused assessment of the pandemic landscape.
He has also been one of America’s leading physicians on the early treatment of COVID-19. His protocols and scientific publications have been relied upon to help millions globally. However, Dr. McCullough has drawn harsh criticism for expressing valid concerns over the public health response, including the mass vaccination of entire populations in the face of an incredible lack of data, from a public health apparatus that has often lacked consistency in it’s public health decisions on Covid-19.
The Baylor Scott and White Health System Foundation has previously been appreciative of Dr. McCullough’s generosity over the years as a major philanthropic donor to the system and, as a prominent graduate of Baylor University with an endowed scholarship in his name, he is commonly associated as a point of pride for Baylor.
Dr. McCullough is adamant that he has not falsely represented himself as Baylor Scott claims.
Speaking to The HighWire, Dr. McCullough stated,
“It was my usual and customary practice to give producers introduction information that was compliant with my settlement agreement on name and professional designations, but could not control pre- or post-production media content.”
He continued,
“Free speech and scientific discourse are the bedrock of progress in medicine and Baylor Scott and White’s ill-advised lawsuit is an attack on civil liberties with serious implications on public health and policy far beyond a lawsuit.”
McCullough’s attorney issued a statement calling the lawsuit a “politically motivated attempt to silence Dr. McCullough.”
A recent write-up said this about Dr. McCullough’s experience, “On paper at least, it’s hard to dismiss McCullough as a quack. According to a bio posted on the US Cardiology Review, he is recognized internationally as a leading authority on chronic kidney disease as a cardiovascular risk state, having published more than 1,000 papers and garnered more than 500 citations in the National Library of Medicine. He also is a founder of the Cardio Renal Society of America, an alliance of cardiologists and nephrologists focused on cardiorenal syndromes. He was previously co-editor of Reviews in Cardiovascular Medicine and served as Chair of the National Kidney Foundations’ Kidney Early Evaluation Program, among the largest screening efforts for chronic diseases. Notably, McCullough was a significant philanthropic donor to his former employer.”
The lawsuit against Dr. McCullough came days before The Federation of State Licensing Boards issued a warning that physicians who post ‘Covid misinformation’ on social media could lose their medical licenses. After witnessing the censorship efforts by Big Tech during the Covid response, it appears there is an effort to create a chilling effect among medical professionals who attempt to communicate data, no matter how sound and accurate, which opposes the official government and public health narrative at the time.
There is a hearing scheduled for a temporary injunction application in Dr. McCullough’s case on August 10.
The HighWire has reached out to Baylor Scott and White for a statement, but have not received a reply at the time of publication.
Dr. McCullough reacts to BSW Lawsuit on the Ingraham Angle: see this.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Comments Off on Major Health Care Provider Files Million Dollar Lawsuit in “Politically Motivated” Attempt to Silence Top COVID Doctor Peter A. McCullough
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
The director of the Pathological Institute of the University of Heidelberg, Peter Schirmacher, has carried out over forty autopsies on people who had died within two weeks of their vaccination. Schirmacher expressed alarm over his findings.
The regional daily Augsburger Allgemeine reported:
“Schirmacher assumes that 30 to 40 percent of them died from the vaccination. In his opinion, the frequency of fatal consequences of vaccinations is underestimated – a politically explosive statement in times when the vaccination campaign is losing momentum, the Delta variant is spreading rapidly and restrictions on non-vaccinated people are being discussed.”
The Merkel administration quickly moved to respond to this “politically explosive” statement from Heidelberg. According to the German Press Agency (dpa), the Paul Ehrlich Institute announced that Schirmacher’s statements were “incomprehensible”. The Chancellor’s lackey, senior German immunologist Thomas Mertens dismissed the findings right away: “I don’t know of any data that would allow a justifiable statement to be made here and I am not assuming an unreported number.”
The immunologist Christian Bogdan from the Erlangen University Hospital, member of the Standing Vaccination Commission (STIKO), also contradicted Schirmacher’s assumption of a “high number of unreported vaccination complications or even deaths”.
The pathologist however received support from his own ranks, and the Federal Association of German Pathologists stated that more autopsies of vaccinated people who died within a certain time frame after vaccination should be performed.
The head of the “Autopsy Working Group” in this association wanted to make general practitioners and health authorities aware of this. In other words, doctors of the patients who die within a few days or weeks after vaccination should apply for an autopsy in case of doubt or the health authorities should take action.
The Federal Association of Pathologists had already requested this in March in a letter to Health Minister Jens Spahn (CDU), but it went unanswered.
Schirmacher’s warning could of course ruin a multi-digit long-term billion-dollar business for various pharmaceutical companies, while the already low willingness to get the jab in the remaining unvaccinated group could further decrease dramatically and ultimately the entire pandemic strategy of the federal government could unravel.
But the seriousness and reputation of the director of the Pathological Institute at the University of Heidelberg are unassailable.
Schirmacher himself is already leading an autopsy project on people who have died from Covid-19, which is subsidized by the state. He himself then expanded the focus and also autopsied more than 40 deceased vaccinated people. Even if his results are only a snapshot, it is a dramatic one: 30 to 40 percent died from the vaccination itself. The pathologist cited “rare, severe side effects of the vaccination – such as cerebral vein thrombosis or autoimmune diseases”.
Schirmacher responded to the criticism from some colleagues. He denied a lack of competence: “The colleagues are definitely wrong because they cannot assess this specific question competently.” Moreover, he has not tried to spread panic, and he is not an opponent of vaccinations – Schirmacher himself has been vaccinated.
The Robert Koch Institute meanwhile refers to the regular safety reports of the Paul Ehrlich Institute on its website. However, should it become apparent in the coming weeks that politics, science and the media are campaigning against Schirmacher and his alarming results are being completely ignored, it would be another red flag regarding the safety of the products.
Twitter meanwhile suspended the account of former New York Times science correspondent Alex Berenson for sharing details of a Pfizer clinical trial with similar findings which completely obliterates the narrative of the political establishment.
According to Pfizer: “During the blinded, controlled period, 15 BNT162b2 and 14 placebo recipients died; during the open-label period, 3 BNT162b2 and 2 original placebo recipients who received BNT162b2 after unblinding died. None of these deaths were considered related to BNT162b2 by investigators.” It stated that the causes of death were balanced between BNT162b2 and placebo groups: 15 people who took the vaccine died and 14 people who took the placebo died.
But tons of people who were in the placebo group have now taken the jab, thus “the trial blind is broken now” and “this is all the data we will ever have,” Berenson pointed out.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Featured image: The director of the Pathological Institute of the University of Heidelberg, Peter Schirmacher. Screenshot from YouTube
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
For the first time in South Korea, a nursing assistant who was paralyzed after receiving a COVID-19vaccine was recognized as a victim of an industrial accident, making her eligible for government benefits and compensation.
The nursing assistant, who has not been identified, received AstraZeneca’s shot on March 12 and later suffered from double vision and paralysis and was diagnosed with acute encephalomyelitis, the state-run Korea Workers’ Compensation & Welfare Service said on Friday.
The service said in a statement the woman did not have underlying conditions and there seemed to be “a reasonable causal link between the side effects and the vaccination.”
AstraZeneca, asked about the case, did not refer to it directly but said patient safety was of the utmost importance for it and regulators around the world.
“International regulators, including the World Health Organization, continue to reaffirm that the vaccine offers a high-level of protection against all severities of COVID-19 and variants of concern, and is a key part of global efforts to overcome the virus,” AstraZeneca said in a statement.
The Korea Disease Control and Prevention Agency (KDCA) had determined that with the available evidence, it could not verify a connection between the woman’s case and the vaccine but it was open to re-evaluation when more evidence was available, said agency official Choi Seung-ho.
South Korea, like many other countries, has indemnified major vaccine makers against claims and set up funds to cover any costs.
It offers up to 10 million won ($8,747) to anyone who suffers serious side effects from the coronavirus vaccines but this is the first case in which the side effects are considered an industrial accident.
Healthcare workers were among the first to be eligible for the vaccines in South Korea and were encouraged by employers to be vaccinated but they were not forced to.
The compensation service concluded that the woman was eligible for government compensation and benefits under the Industrial Accident Compensation Insurance Act because her medical situation was related to her work.
She will be compensated for missed work hours and benefits will cover her medical expenses and disabilities, the service spokesman told Reuters. There were six more cases pending a decision, the spokesman said.
The KDCA said a total of 1,562 cases, including 14 deaths, had been reviewed for compensation regarding damages from COVID-19 vaccination, of which 983 had been compensated. There has been no compensation for a case involving a death.
Liability and Claims
AstraZeneca has been granted protection from product liability claims related to its COVID-19 vaccine by most of the countries with which it has struck supply agreements.
After reports of rare blood clots associated with the vaccine this year, several countries announced restrictions on its use in younger people.
In Asia, countries including Singapore, Australia, Thailand and Malaysia have financial assistance programs or set up compensation funds for those who suffer serious side effects from vaccines.
In Thailand, the government has paid out 13 million baht ($389,454) to 400 cases of COVID-19 vaccine side-effects, its health agency said. In cases of death, it pays 400,000 baht, and side effects that impact daily life, 240,000 baht.
Payments are not proof, however, that the vaccines have side effects, it said, because that is under the purview of an expert panel.
This year, the World Health Organization agreed to a no-fault compensation plan for claims of serious side effects in people in 92 poorer countries due to get COVID-19 vaccines via the COVAX sharing scheme.
India, which has the second-highest number of cases globally, is a holdout. The government is in talks over legal protection sought by companies like Pfizer and Moderna, and no shots have been shipped by these companies. The U.S. government has a compensation fund for people who are victims of side effects of a vaccine, but lawyers say few claims have been compensated.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Reports coming out of Israel claim hospitals are being filled with vaccinated people, 95 percent of whom are suffering serious illness being fully vaccinated.
“I understand that most of the patients are vaccinated, even ‘severe’ patients. Exactly. Naturally occurring. Old people, most of them are vaccinated,” Israeli Dr. Kobi Haviv told News Israel 13 Thursday.
"95% of the severe patients are vaccinated". "85-90% of the hospitalizations are in Fully vaccinated people." "We are opening more and more COVID wards." "The effectiveness of the vaccine is waning/fading out"
“Most of the population is vaccinated, and 90%… 85%-90% of the hospitalizations here are ‘Fully vaccinated’ people.”
Dr. Haviv claims the infections mean the vaccines’ “effectiveness” is fading, possibly setting up a scenario where booster shots emerge as a necessary treatment.
The news out of Israel coincides with similar statistics coming out of Sydney, Australia, where government health officials late last month announced nearly all new Covid hospitalizations involve vaccinated people – except one.
The same phenomenon is being observed across the globe as the vaccine propaganda ratchets up in response to the dreaded Delta variant.
BREAKING: Figures from Public Health England say 55% of people hospitalised with the delta variant were unvaccinated, while nearly 35% had received two doses of a vaccine.
In the US, there’s been over 4,100 so-called “breakthrough cases” in fully vaccinated people as of last month – with the pro-vaccine narrative shifting to claim the illnesses aren’t as severe as those of unvaccinated people.
As more and more vaccinated people become sick with the very illness they’re supposed to be protected against, will the vaccine manufacturers ever be held responsible for spreading disease?
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
A decade ago today, I posted the translation reproduced below of a TV news report in Pakistan about the alleged killing of Osama bin Laden by a strike team of Navy SEALS sent in by Obama.I had previously posted a video of the news report which had subscripts explaining in English what was being said, but not myself familiar with the language as a check on the veracity of the subscripts I had the news report translated by a qualified person.What is reproduced below is my column of August 7, 2011.
But first permit me to briefly recap the story.The Obama regime made a dramatic announcement that a Navy SEAL team had just killed Osama bin Laden in Pakistan.The dramatic announcement was accompanied by the claim that Obama and top officials of his regime had watched the operation live.This news report was complete with a photo of Obama and his team intently watching a TV screen while Obama was being terminated.
The claim that the WH watched the raid and death of bin Laden was quickly abandoned as obviously the visual evidence would have been recorded, and everyone would be asking to see the non-existent visual evidence.
Pakistan TV reporters descended on the scene in Abbottabad, Pakistan, and made discoveries that totally contradicted the White House claim.No one had ever seen bin Laden, and the compound the Americans said he lived in was lived in by different people known to the community.
First, the entire scene was witnessed, and a witness stepped forward.A helicopter landed. Its occupants spoke Pashtun and ordered people not to come out of their houses. The peoplelanded by the helicopter went into the alleged bin Laden compound.They returned in 20 minutes, the helicopter began lifting off with all who returned and exploded.All were killed. There were no survivors. Body parts and pieces of the helicopter were everywhere. 200 residents of the neighborhood witnessed that no other helicopter landed. The witness wants to know how the Americans have bin Laden when no one left alive.
You might remember that the Obama regime never presented any evidence that bin Laden had been in their hands. The Obama regime story was that his body was taken by helicopter to a US aircraft carrier and dumped over board in the Indian Ocean in an official Muslim burial.
This story also fell apart. On an aircraft carrier many people are up all night. Sailors reported home that there was no such burial.
The next thing that happened is that the SEAL team, members of which had allegedly conducted the raid that killed bin Laden, were all loaded on a Vietnam era helicopter in Afghanistan, and all were lost allegedly to enemy fire.It was a scandal.Parents reported that their sons had written that something was wrong and they felt threatened. Parents demanded to know why the team, contrary to official policy, was concentrated in one place on an outdated helicopter with no armor protection. The SEALS had been asking who was on the raid, and apparently none of them were. The controversy made the media, but media soon took it silent. Later a person claiming to be the SEAL who killed bin Laden appeared and wrote a book.
Obama’s presidency wasn’t doing well, and some Democrats were talking about running a candidate against him for the nomination. The killing of bin Laden hoax boosted Obama’s standing, and he was renominated without challenge.
Osama bin Laden had actually died a decade previously to Obama’s claim.He died of renal failure and other health problems. His death was widely reported in world news and by Fox News in the US.
I posted some of the obituary notices on November 20, 2013.Here they are.
A Funeral Notice for Osama bin Laden was published on December 26, 2001, in the Egyptian newspaper al-Ward. An English translation is provided below. Anyone fluent in Arabic is invited to verify or correct the translation. This item was sent to me from a reader abroad.
Also below are is a CNN interview with its medical correspondent who examines the last non-faked video of bin Laden and concludes that bin Laden is seriously ill.
There is also below a 2002 report that Israeli intelligence has concluded that bin Laden is dead.
I cannot attest to the correctness of any of these reports, but it is unclear why there would be so much disinformation from such varied sources about bin Laden’s condition or what purpose is served.
You can use this information to evaluate the Obama regime’s unsubstantiated claim that Navy SEALs killed bin Laden in Pakistan a decade later.
Try to identify a single event that the US government has not lied about. Weapons of mass destruction? Iranian nukes? Assad’s chemical attack? Spying on Americans? 9/11? The assassination of President John F. Kennedy? The unemployment rate?
*
Osama Bin Laden is dead since December 26, 2001. Translation of Funeral Article in Egyptian Paper al-Wafd
The original article:
Translation of Funeral Article in Egyptian Paper:
al-Wafd, Wednesday, December 26, 2001 Vol 15 No 4633
News of Bin Laden’s Death and Funeral 10 days ago
Islamabad –
A prominent official in the Afghan Talaban movement announced yesterday the death of Osama bin Laden, the chief of al-Qa’da organization, stating that bin Laden suffered serious complications in the lungs and died a natural and quiet death.
The official, who asked to remain anonymous, stated to The Observer of Pakistan that he had himself attended the funeral of bin Laden and saw his face prior to burial in Tora Bora 10 days ago. He mentioned that 30 of al-Qa’da fighters attended the burial as well as members of his family and some friends from the Talaban.
In the farewell ceremony to his final rest guns were fired in the air. The official stated that it is difficult to pinpoint the burial location of bin Laden because according to the Wahhabi tradition no mark is left by the grave. He stressed that it is unlikely that the American forces would ever uncover any traces of bin Laden.
Dr. Sanjay Gupta: Bin Laden would need help if on dialysis (CNN) 1-21-02 –Speculation about the whereabouts and health of Osama bin Laden picked up over the weekend when Pakistan’s president, Gen. Pervez Musharraf, said he thought bin Laden had likely died of kidney failure. CNN medical correspondent Dr. Sanjay Gupta spoke Monday with CNN’s Paula Zahn about bin Laden’s appearance in recently released videotapes and the possibility that the accused terrorist leader was undergoing kidney treatment.
ZAHN: For a point of reference, I’d like for you to analyze pictures of Osama bin Laden that apparently were taken prior to September 11. Describe to us the color and the tone of his skin, and then I want you to contrast that with pictures we know to have been taken much later.
GUPTA: You can look [at pictures from a December 2001 video] and notice that he has what some doctors refer to as sort of a frosting over of his features — his sort of grayness of beard, his paleness of skin, very gaunt sort of features. A lot of times people associate this with chronic illness. Doctors can certainly look at that and determine some clinical features. But even more than that, it’s sometimes possible to differentiate the specific type of disease or illness that he may be suffering from. The sort of frosting of the appearance is something that people a lot of times associate with chronic kidney failure, renal failure, certainly someone who is requiring dialysis would have that.
He’s also not moving his arms. I looked at this tape all the way through its entire length. He never moved his left arm at all. The reason that might be important is because people who have had a stroke — and certainly people are at increased risk of stroke if they also have kidney failure — he may have had a stroke and therefore is not moving his left side. And in the rest of the videotape, he does move his right side a little bit more than he does his left. So those are some of the things that are sort of “of note” here in this more recent videotape.
ZAHN: I think we need to remind the viewers once again that the president of Pakistan talked about [bin Laden] importing two dialysis machines into Afghanistan. Of course, no one other than the president of Pakistan right now is confirming that [bin Laden] in fact needed dialysis.
GUPTA: That’s right. And again, renal dialysis — talking about hemodialysis — is something that really is reserved for patients in end-stage renal failure. That means their kidneys have just completely shut down.
The most common cause of something like that would be something like diabetes and hypertension. Once that’s happened, if you’re separated from your dialysis machine — and incidentally, dialysis machines require electricity, they’re going to require clean water, they’re going to require a sterile setting — infection is a huge risk with that. If you don’t have all those things and a functioning dialysis machine, it’s unlikely that you’d survive beyond several days or a week at the most.
ZAHN: If he had all these things you’re talking about to keep the dialysis machine running, how much help does he need around him to administer the treatment?
GUPTA: You certainly need someone who really knows how to run that dialysis machine. You have to have someone who’s actually assessing his blood, Osama bin Laden’s blood, to see what particular dialysate he would need, and to be able to change his dialysate as needed. So you’d need a kidney specialist, a technician — quite a few people around him.
*
Israeli intelligence: Bin Laden is dead, heir has been chosen
SPECIAL TO WORLD TRIBUNE.COM
Wednesday, October 16, 2002
TEL AVIV Osama Bin Laden appears to be dead but his colleagues have decided that Al Qaida and its insurgency campaign against the United States will continue, Israeli intelligence sources said.
Al Qaida terrorists have launched a new campaign of economic warfare and are targeting shipping in the Middle East, according to U.S. intelligence officials.
The Israeli sources said Israel and the United States assess that Bin Laden probably died in the U.S. military campaign in Afghanistan in December. They said the emergence of new messages by Bin Laden are probably fabrications, Middle East Newsline reported.
But Bin Laden’s heir has been chosen and his colleagues have decided to resume Al Qaida’s offensive against the United States and Western allies, the sources said.
They said the organization regards the United States as the main target followed by Israel. “In this case, it doesn’t matter whether Bin Laden is alive or not,” a senior Israeli intelligence source said. “The organization goes on with help from key people.”
The sources said Al Qaida has already determined Bin Laden’s heir. They said the heir has not been identified, but is probably not Bin Laden’s son, Saad. Saad is said to be in his 20s and ranked within the top 20 members of Al Qaida.
Earlier this week, Bin Laden’s deputy, Ayman Zawahiri, was said to have released a videotape in which he claims that the Al Qaida leader is alive and functioning. Bin Laden’s voice was not heard on the tape.
A senior Bush administration economic official said last week that another major Al Qaida attack anywhere in the world could have devastating economic repercussions.
The FBI warned last week that Al Qaida may be preparing for a major attack. The warning followed the release of an audio tape featuring the voice of Zawahiri.
Bombings in Bali aimed at tourists, an attack on U.S. soldiers training in Kuwait and the bombing of a French tanker in Yemen are signs of the new campaign, Geostrategy-Direct.com reported in its Oct. 22 edition.
The first attack was carried out last week with the Al Qaida terrorist attack on the French tanker Limburg, a 157,000-ton ultra large crude oil carrier, that was bombed as it picked up a pilot before mooring at the Yemeni port of al Shihr.
One crew member was killed and others were injured in the blast.
According to intelligence officials, a small boat approached at high
speed from the starboard side of the ship and detonated a large explosive device.
A week earlier, the Office of Naval Intelligence issued an alert to ships in the Middle East to be alert for Al Qaida terrorist attacks.
Fox News, along with a number of international news sources, such as the Pakistan Observer, reported bin Laden’s death on Dec. 26, 2001. http://www.foxnews.com/story/2001/12/26/report-bin-laden-already-dead/ But this didn’t stop Fox News from joining in the hype about “CIA-Led SEALs Team Delivers Blow To Al Qaeda” ten years later on May 2, 2011.
Now evaluate the probability that the world’s most sought person by Washington was in a house occupied by two identified persons by the neighbors with neighbors’ gardens within the compound walls.Osama has no bodyguards, no protection.He is with two women undefended, and SEALS shoot him down instead of capturing the “mastermind” and presenting him as an American trophy that can be questioned.As you know, I use the term “dumbshit American” and the multitudes that fell for this clearly deserve the term.
*
Here is the interview with the eyewitnesses to the raid on Osama bin Laden:
Pakistan TV Report Contradicts US Claim of Bin Laden’s Death
By Paul Craig Roberts on August 7, 2011 at 1:00am
In my recent article, “Creating Evidence Where There Is None,”about the alleged killing of Osama bin Laden by a commando team of US Seals in Abbottabad, Pakistan, I provided a link to a Pakistani National TV interview with Muhammad Bashir, who lives next door to the alleged “compound” of Osama bin Laden. I described the story that Bashir gave of the “attack” and its enormous difference from the one told by the US government. In Bashir’s account, every member of the landing party and anyone brought from the house died when the helicopter exploded on lift-off. I wrote that a qualified person could easily provide a translation of the interview, but that no American print or TV news organization had investigated Bashir’s account.
An attorney with a British Master of Laws degree in international law and diplomacy, who was born in Pakistan, provided the translation below. He writes: “I have no problem with being identified as the translator, but would prefer to remain anonymous. “
The translator provides these definitions and clarifications:
“Gulley” is generally referred (in Urdu) to a sidewalk or pavement. Also for the space between two houses.
“kanal” is a traditional unit of land area, so that one kanal equals exactly 605 square yards or 1/8 Acre; this is equivalent to about 505. 857 square meters.
Muhammad Bashir refers to himself as “We”. This is common respectable language for the self; to use the plural term instead of singular. The English language equivalent would be the “Royal, We”.
Urdu is the national language and lingua franca of Pakistan.
The translator:
I have translated the entire text of the video.
I have tried my best to keep words in a chronological order, but in some cases this is not possible, as in translation words must be replaced in reverse order to make sense! However, I have had to put a few words in brackets to clarify meaning. If you want to ask about any section—please supply time stamp and I will supply a contextual text.
Video Transcript:
Welcome back!—Muhammad Bashir, Abotabad Area, Bilal Town resident, Looks like an ordinary person, but he is no ordinary person! Muhammad Bashir, lives in Abotabad’s, Bilal Town Opposite Bin Laden’s House.
Night of 2nd May Muhammad Bashir was on the roof of his house, whereupon, the entire OBL, American operation was seen with his own eyes.
Last night, when our team was in Abotabad, Bilal Town, near OBL house, Muhammad Bashir approached me and said that:
“Sister, I want to tell you something that is a great burden on my heart and conscience”—Listen to what he said:
00: 59 Muhammad Bashir: I. . today. . . would like to comment about todays Abotabad operation events, until now, what I am about to say, no person has said.
01: 08: Reporter: But, Muhammad Bashir sahib appeared frightened. While speaking to me, Muhammad Bashir sahib phoned his relative; leader, M. E. A. of Jamaat-e-islami, Abotabad, Abdul Razaq Abaasi on the phone.
01: 21: reporter: Tell me your name and where do you live?
Muhammad Bashir: —One minute, first I need to speak to him. . . I am going to give an interview, a complete interview. Shall I give a complete interview or half?
Reporter: Complete!—complete!
Muhammad Bashir: I first need to phone him, I need to speak to him
Reporter: I could of. . .
01: 39: Reporter: Muhammad Bashir sahib, on that night’s events of the American operation, that took place, he expressed such comments about circumstances that have never been expressed before, therefore, we checked his ID card, his place of residence and we can confirm that he definitely lives there and we also approached senior politicians and asked about him, after hearing his comments, we were amazed—now you watch what he said.
01: 57: Muhammad Bashir: The events that happened are thus; we were awake, we were not asleep.
02: 00: Muhammad Bashir: a Helicopter came, and circled and dropped some people there.
02: 07: Muhammad Bashir: in that house. . . where they are saying; Osama lives here, on that house’s roof, they dropped people, after that, the helicopter returned and went back.
02: 16: Reporter: How many people were they?
02: 18: Muhammad Bashir: They were ten, twelve people
02: 20: Muhammad Bashir: After that it left and for approximately 20 minutes, there behind us, on those mountains, it kept going around, the top of the mountains.
02: 27: After 20 minutes, it returned. When it returned, at that time there were TWO more helicopters arrived. One came from the West and one came from the North. When it approached for landing, after that. . .
At this point; Video cut and resumed:
02: 41: Muhammad Bashir: that helicopter, there was an explosion within it and there was fire within it, immediately, we
came out and arrived there. When we arrived, the helicopter was on fire, it was burning. After that, about twenty minutes later the Army arrived, the police arrived. They moved all of us back. . .
03: 04: Muhammad Bashir: . . . and all the people inside it, all of them. . . we think; if Osama was inside it, or inside this house—then who took him to the Americans?
03: 16: Muhammad Bashir: Because America. . . the helicopters that America is saying; IT carried out the operation. If America did this operation and it’s army came and it’s helicopter came, then that helicopter that came from the American’s, within that, all the people that came, those people with the explosion were finished, got destroyed!
03: 35: Muhammad Bashir: Within it, there was fire, those people, all of them died!
03: 39: and if Osama was there, they would have put him in the helicopter. Obviously, if the helicopter caught fire, Osama could have died there. If their own people were gone, (dead) so could have Osama. After that, the fallen helicopter was destroyed after this, how can Osama be, with them in America? this is a strange thing!
Video cut & resumes
03: 59: Muhammad Bashir: They are saying we killed Osama here. After that, they picked him up and took him away.
04: 04: Muhammad Bashir: PICKED HIM UP AND TOOK HIM AWAY—how did they do this? This, what we are thinking!
04: 07: Muhammad Bashir: The Americans’ helicopter that came, that fell here and got destroyed!
04: 09: Reporter: There was only ONE helicopter?
04: 11: Muhammad Bashir: ONE helicopter landed down here, the second helicopter came from above and went towards Mansera.
It did not land. No second helicopter landed!
04: 20: Only ONE helicopter, that first dropped it’s passengers, the SAME returned to pick the people and there was an explosion within it.
04: 27: Reporter: People were inside it?
04: 29: Muhammad Bashir: People were inside it!
04: 30: Reporter: How do you know this?
04: 32: Muhammad Bashir: These people, we seen them all
04: 34: Reporter: In the helicopter. . . you saw dead people?
04: 36: Muhammad Bashir: We saw dead people!
04: 38: Reporter: How many people?
04: 39: Muhammad Bashir: This, we could not count, within the compound there was fire.
04: 43: Muhammad Bashir: and we. . . the gate was open, we entered the gate, at that time the Army had not arrived.
04: 48: Muhammad Bashir: Police had not arrived. Some people from the agencies, were present, but they did not prevent anybody, they kept entering, every person was looking , now, nobody is saying, but everyone from the mohalla (neighbourhood) and all the people present from the mohalla arrived first. We saw the gate open, we entered inside, saw the burning helicopter, the people inside were dead. After that everything was lifted. Now, there is nothing there!
05: 16: Reporter: How many dead bodies did you see?
05: 18: Muhammad Bashir: Look, you cannot count, the dead bodies were in pieces everything else was broken pieces, some here, some there, some broken, some half, some like this.
05: 27: Reporter: Tell me fully—what happened?
06: 30: Reporter: Tell me the full events
05: 31: Muhammad Bashir: I told you, this is. . .
05: 32: Reporter: You did not. . . I cannot believe this, that’s why.
05: 36: Muhammad Bashir: Look, what I have said—that’s it!
Video Cut!
05: 39: Reporter: When you saw the American craft, (Helicopter) what did you think, why they came here?
05: 42: Muhammad Bashir: We thought. . . this is it. . . why did they came? we thought why did they come? maybe. . we. . . did not
expect them to do anything, we thought maybe our Army is arriving at some centre and the army people were sleeping,
there was no explosions or events taking place, nothing was happening, everybody was sleeping, for 20 minutes or so. . .
06: 05: Reporter: The craft landed in front of your house, how did you feel about this?
06: 08: Muhammad Bashir: I thought. . just. . . understand. . . imagine. . we thought we’re dead!
Video cut:
06: 13: Reporter: But, how did the Americans return?
06: 16: Muhammad Bashir: This is what I am saying; their Craft came and the helicopter was destroyed, HOW, could they return?
06: 22: Reporter: Tell me this; you say, that you saw the dead bodies yourself. . . .
06: 25: Muhammad Bashir: one more thing, Madam, may I tell you; The people who were dropped from the craft, That walkway . . . that . . where our gates are. . . they banged them hard. . . and shouted. . . don’t come out. . . don’t do this, don’t do that, if you come
out you will be shot. . we will do this, we will do that, all the people who were dropped, all of them spoke Pashtu
(Afgahni Language)—Pakhtun!
06: 49: Reporter: Who were these people?
06: 49: Muhammad Bashir: This I do not know! Those who were dropped from the craft (helicopter), those people.
06: 57: Muhammad Bashir: They WERE Pashtun! we do not know if they were working for the Americans, we do not know if they were working for Pakistan, we do not know if they were army people or civilian, what people, BUT they SPOKE PASHTU!
07: 07: Reporter: You said you heard they were asking for Osama?
07: 09: Muhammad Bashir: No, they didn’t ask me about Osama, they just said, do not come out, if you come out from your house, we will shoot you!
07: 16: Reporter: Were these Pakistani people?
Muhammad Bashir: who?
07: 18: Reporter: The ones who were saying that if you come out, we will shoot you.
07: 20: Muhammad Bashir: They said that in Pashtu!
07: 22: Reporter: so did they. . were you coming out. . . exactly where were you, where was you standing when this happened?
07: 26: Muhammad Bashir: Inside the house, on top of the roof, I was not in the house, just on top of the (flat)roof
07: 29: Reporter: from Above the roof these people in the helicopter. . .
07: 30: Muhammad Bashir: I was on the roof, sitting, no, lying down, on the roof,lying and watching this and what was happening
07: 37: Reporter: Fear, was you not afraid? did you not think to phone someone?
07: 40: Muhammad Bashir: From the house, They were calling me from downstairs, the children were calling me, come down, come down, and I told them stop making noise! go into your rooms, I am watching what is happening. Afterwards, I found
out about this, that, Osama was killed here!
07: 53: Reporter: How did you get inside? (the compound)
Muhammad Bashir: where?
Reporter: when there was fire.
Muhammad Bashir: the gate was open, when there was fire, the gate was open.
08: 02: Reporter: The house gate was open?
08: 03: Muhammad Bashir: The outer gate, the big gate, was open.
08: 06: Reporter: You came from upstairs to downstairs?
08: 08: Muhammad Bashir: I came down, from my own house into the gulley, I didn’t go alone inside the other house, 200 other people went inside! Everybody saw it!
08: 15: Reporter: All 200 saw the dead bodies?
08: 17: Muhammad Bashir: Everybody saw this. Whoever went inside they saw everything!
08: 20: Reporting: the events at that time that are in your mind, please express them.
08: 28: Muhammad Bashir: I have told you this and this, in my mind, this is what I have seen, when we were there, when we entered the gate, When the helicopter exploded, it scattered everywhere, one piece fell over there, one fell here, one here, a lot of pieces fell in the gulley outside, they reached up to the gulley and our house and also some pieces managed to reach onto my roof. so, the area of the open space there (in front of the house) is about four Kanal in size. It is a very large compound. You cannot see all of it from one location. Four Kanal is a big area, only in a small area you could possibly see everything. There I saw some people, in broken pieces, someone’s leg, someone’s arm, someone’s torso, someone’s head. Beside this, I did not see intensely, who are they, how are they, because I thought that one of our own craft had fallen and the people within it were our own people. Because they spoke Pashtu they could be pakistani.
09: 35: Muhammad Bashir: but language does not necessarily mean. . by speaking it. . . the American language could be spoken, the agents can speak all sorts of languages. It could be that it is the American army and they could speak Pashtu and the people would think that it is our own people.
09: 54: Reporter: Seeing the dead bodies—did you not feel fear?
09: 57: Muhammad Bashir: But we were thinking about ourselves at the time, but seeing the dead bodies who felt frightened?
10: 00: Reporter: When you went inside, what did you do after that, how did you come out?
10: 02: Muhammad Bashir: we came out, our Army reached there, when the army arrived, they moved all the people back. Move aside, move aside! So we moved aside. Then they closed the area down.
10: 13: Reporter: did Rais see this?
Muhammad Bashir: What?
Reporter: where was your cousin?
10: 18: Muhammad Bashir: My cousin was at that time in the house.
10: 20: Reporter: Did he go with you?
10: 21: Muhammad Bashir: He was with me, but I did not notice when he was picked up.
10: 28: Reporter: Has he returned yet?
10: 29: Muhammad Bashir: Yes, he has returned. They picked him up and took him away.
10: 32: Reporter: What is he saying?
10: 34: Muhammad Bashir: I have not met him yet, he is at home they will not let him come out, we are not allowed to visit him, they will not let him come out. We have not met.
10: 40: Reporter: You was not able find out, but since when have you been allowed out.
10: 45: Muhammad Bashir: I did not go home, by going home. . .
Reporter: You have seen the fire you have seen the bodies how long did you stay there?
Muhammad Bashir: approximately, after five or six minutes, I left and came out. . five, six minute. . what happened . . . . the reason we left, was that after we entered, there was another small explosion, I do not know if the engine fail and
there was another fire, it was a small explosion, after this explosion all the people ran out.
11: 06: Muhammad Bashir: when we went out, nobody let us go back in again.
11: 11: Reporter: Besides you, why is nobody else saying these things? why are you alone in this?
11: 16: Muhammad Bashir: Look, what we have seen, that is what we are saying and we are speaking for this reason that, we are sad that such humble and nice people of our town, that has never seen such events, no fighting, no arguments, no animosity, No murders, such nice people of ours in this town and they have been branded as terrorists.
11: 43: Reporter: Tell me; two helicopters came, lifted and took the rest of the people?
11: 46: Muhammad Bashir: No—they did not take the rest of the people, because they did not even land, One came from the West and it left towards the North, the one that came from the North, left towards the South. They did not land!
12: 00: Studio Reporter: these events that we showed you from Abotabad, there are many more things that we discovered about the compound where OBL was staying, there were vegetables planted there, what kind of vegetables, the person who grows the vegetables is the cousin of this person (Muhammad Bashir), whose interview we have shown. An extraordinary thing that he has said and he has sworn repeatedly on the veracity of his statement. this is from his own account and upon this account do view this. Yesterday we found out and it has been confirmed that there were two Ashfaq’s who lived there (in the compound): Mr Arshad and Mr Tariq who went shopping locally and used to buy international brands, the items they found in the house, dry dates, dried meat and things like this, this person who you saw in the interview in his house there was food from OBL’s house, he was given Kaabli Pillau (Rice) and such items were presented to him, There the view of local mosque people, what they think of OBL all these things we will present to you in an exclusive program an important newsbeat, todays time is finishing, do write to us at newsbeat@samaa. tv where you can get other information as well and you can join us at newsbeat with Fareeha Idrees thats my favourite bit, do write to us, the time is up now, By your permission to leave, take care of yourself, In Allah’s care.
13: 20: Reporter: I am now at standing in front of Abdullah Bin Zubair Mosque, this is the same mosque that is within walking distance from OBL’s house. Are you saying that if people found out that OBL was living here, would they be happy?
1st man: Possibly, people could be happy.
2nd man: He wasn’t living here, but he was a Muslim, he believed in Allah.
End of translation
Anyone fluent in Urdu who wishes to dispute the translation should do so.
I asked the translator if he might contact the Pakistani news organization and inquire if the reporters had further investigated Bashir’s story. He replied that he could do so, but exactly 24 hours later “for some unknown reason” the news organization started to discredit Bashir by connecting “him to his cousin, who is accused of receiving foodstuffs from the household of OBL. “
Bashir’s cousin is the person who, according to the reporter (see 12: 00 time line) had a vegetable garden inside the wall of the alleged bin Laden compound. Is it likely that with a hunted and dangerous person hiding within, locals would be permitted to have vegetable gardens inside the compound? The cousin’s vegetable garden obviously had to be redefined as “receiving foodstuffs from OBL. “
The translator offers his view on the 13: 20 timeline:
“The final seconds of the video clip contain random people to generate and show some kind of sympathy with OBL in the district.
“It would be very difficult to find people in Pakistan who sympathise with OBL or the Taliban. The only people who do sympathise are the poor illiterate people who do not know about the religion and can easily be convinced of a distorted version of Islam.
Therefore, the closing part of the video contains, out of context expressions:
“1st man: Possibly, people could be happy. (Meaning it is possible that SOME people could be happy. )
2nd man: He wasn’t living here, but he was a Muslim, he believed in Allah. (Meaning; he claimed to be Muslim, so he must have believed in Allah. )
“Therefore, it seems that although initially, the TV station was overjoyed with this interview, they changed their tune, twenty four hours later. (for some unknown reason.)”
*
Readers can arrive at their own conclusions. It seems clear to me that under intense pressure and serious threats from the US government, the Pakistani government fell in line with the US government’s claim that a commando raid had killed bin Laden, and that the TV news organization got the message to get in line also.
It is likely that the many witnesses who observed the dead from the helicopter crash have been warned to keep quiet. However, a news organization, should one be so inclined, could certainly interview Bashir and the 200 others who saw the dead bodies. A good reporter, perhaps accompanied by trained psychologists, would be able to tell if people were lying out of fear and encourage some to speak anonymously.
I am confident that no news organization believes that it could confront such an important US national myth in this way. The killing of bin Laden satisfies the emotional need for revenge and justice. In the least, a news organization that challenged the government’s story would be cut off from all government sources and be denounced by politicians and a large percentage of the US population as an anti-American terrorist-serving organization.
OBL’s death will remain one of those many “truths” that rest on nothing but the government’s word.
ALSO SEE: (Many of these have been taken down.The Establishment has tried to erase all evidence.)
The question before us is:How can Americans have any hope when they never fail to fall for orchestrated events designed to serve the hidden agendas of the establishment.Without going back in time, just consider a few of the hoaxes put over on dumbshit Americans in the 21st center:9/11, Saddam Hussein’s weapons of mass destruction, Assayd’s use of chemical weapons, Washington’s destruction of Libya, Russian invasion of Ukraine, Russian downing of Malaysian Airliner, Putin’s poisoning of Skripals and Navalny, Russiagate, Impeachgate, Trump Insurrectionists, Covid pandemic.
Americans live in a world of strictly controlled information.There is only one narrative. All others are “disinformation” and censored by social media and the presstitute media.People who dissent from the narrative are cancelled. The result is explanations in which evidence plays no role.Orchestrations rule.If. You challenge them, you are ignored and denounced as a conspiracy theorist or domestic terrorist. The reason America is doomed is that Americans as a people are no longer capable of weighing evidence and arriving at fact-based decisions.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Dr. Paul Craig Roberts writes on his blog site, PCR Institute for Political Economy, where this article was originally published. He is a frequent contributor to Global Research.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
This episode of terror is most likely not going to end given the failures of past attempts to settle the dispute. As many episodes of Global Research have made clear, the United States have used so-called peace deals to harness more power to them, with Israel as their junior partner.
However, there is another player on the stage that similarly steered the course on the side of Israel against the Palestinians. As outspoken author Yves Engler has pointed out in his book Canada and Israel: Building Apartheid, both of the governing parties in our home and native land and even the Left are promoting Israel.
On this week’s program, we present a panel discussion produced by the Canadian Foreign Policy Institute entitled Innumerable Ways Canada Supports Israeli Apartheid – And What We Can Do About it.
The Canadian Foreign Policy Institute is a non-partisan organization which seeks to inform people living in Canada about the country’s diplomatic, aid, intelligence, trade and military policies abroad which are at odds with their self-portrait as a benevolent force around the world. Its director is Bianca Mugyenyi who will function as the moderator for the discussion.
CIXX 106.9 FM, broadcasting from Fanshawe College in London, Ontario. It airs Sundays at 6am.
WZBC 90.3 FM in Newton Massachusetts is Boston College Radio and broadcasts to the greater Boston area. The Global Research News Hour airs during Truth and Justice Radio which starts Sunday at 6am.
Campus and community radio CFMH 107.3fm in Saint John, N.B. airs the Global Research News Hour Fridays at 7pm.
CJMP 90.1 FM, Powell River Community Radio, airs the Global Research News Hour every Saturday at 8am.
Caper Radio CJBU 107.3FM in Sydney, Cape Breton, Nova Scotia airs the Global Research News Hour starting Wednesday afternoon from 3-4pm.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Black politics are key to recognizing the most important social dynamics of the United States. Over the past 40 years, no commentator has been as deeply insightful about the paradoxes and personalities of Black American public life as the journalist and radio host the late Glen Ford.
His Legacy will Live
***
In this stunning overview, Ford draws from his work for Black Agenda Report, one of the most incisive and perceptive publications of the progressive left, to examine competing struggles for class power and identity in the Black movement. In a survey stretching from the violent gentrification of New Orleans in the wake of Hurricane Katrina, through the engineered bankruptcy of Detroit, to the “more effective evil” of the Obama presidency, Ford casts a caustic eye on the empty posturing and corruption of the Democratic Party. This, he insists, depends on a Black constituency for electoral success, while using a co-opted “Black misleadership class” to sell out working people’s interests.
Profiling along the way storied Black leaders such as Martin Luther King, Malcom X and James Brown (for whom Ford once worked), The Black Agenda looks, too, beyond American shores at US intervention in Libya, the Congo and the Middle East, showing how these are imbricated with racism at home. Ford concludes with a discussion of the Black Lives Matter movement, setting out both its pitfalls and potentialities.
“Glen Ford was the most brilliant, courageous and consistent writer and journalist in the Black radical and independent tradition, of his generation – from the Sixties until now.” —Cornel West
“Glen Ford was the consummate journalist, a man who demanded rigorous analysis of himself and others, and who lived by the dictum of afflicting the comfortable and comforting the afflicted.” —Margaret Kimberley – co-founder, Black Agenda Report
“Anyone who followed or knew Glen Ford was mentored by him. He is one of the few among us who lived by Amilcar Cabral’s iconic words: ’Tell no lies, claim no easy victories!’” —Danny Haiphong
“Glen’s transition to an ancestor has left a huge hole in our movement, not to mention in the hearts of so many of us.” —Ajamu Baraka
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Ex-special agent Turner, who was retaliated against when she embarrassed the FBI for exposing her colleague’s failure to investigate serious child sex abuse crimes on North Dakota Indian reservations, explains that crimes like those committed by former USA Gymnastics physician Dr. Larry Nasser take so long to be addressed or aren’t addressed at all because many agents are uncomfortable dealing with them, they aren’t trained to properly investigate them and they do not lead to major promotions.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
The world’s first nuclear explosion occurred on July 16, 1945, when a plutonium implosion device was tested at a site located 210 miles south of Los Alamos, New Mexico, on the barren plains of the Alamogordo Bombing Range, known as the Jornada del Muerto (day of the dead).
US President Harry Truman ordered the first atomic bomb to be dropped on Hiroshima, Japan on August 6, 1945. Days later (August 9) Washington dropped a second bomb on Nagasaki.
Official figures of those killed by the atomic bombs is well over 150,000 from the two cities. More than 100,000 were injured with most likely dying. Then over the years many thousands have died from the initial radiation poisoning.
Trip to Hiroshima & Nagasaki
On a trip to Japan for memorial events at Hiroshima and Nagasaki in 1984 I met many Hibakusha (survivors of the US bombing attacks in 1945). One told the story that after the bomb was dropped the US military would not initially allow medical personnel to come tend the injured. Instead US radiological teams came in to study the effects of the bombing on the people. Arms and legs were cut off and taken back to the US. Photos were taken. Skin samples and blood were taken. The Japanese people were lab rats for the Americans to study.
When I returned home to Orlando, Florida where I was working for the Florida Coalition for Peace & Justice I decided that I had to share this story with the larger community. The Orlando Sentinel newspaper had a regular column called ‘My Word’ so I sent in a piece about what the Hibakusha told me. The paper refused to print it saying that I could not prove what I had written.
We’ve been dealing with this same kind of censorship ever since.
A soldier’s story
In 1997, while still working for the Florida Coalition, we were organizing a campaign to stop NASA’s launch of 72 pounds of deadly plutonium-238 to be used for on-board heat and power on a deep space mission called Cassini. Prior to the launch we were holding a rally at Cape Canaveral (now called Cape Canaveral Space Force Station) and before we began an older man walked up to me and asked to speak. I asked him what he wanted to say.
He said that when the first a-bomb was exploded at Alamogordo in 1945 he was just a new recruit in the Army. He was a paratrooper. His unit was put on a transport plane and dropped into the mushroom cloud. The troopers were then medically tested and put on a train for a long trip around the country. While on the train every now and then it would stop and the GI’s would be medically tested again.
He said it wasn’t until years later he learned that at each stop was a Department of Energy (DoE) nuclear lab that helped work on the bomb program. The GI’s were tested for time, space, longitude, latitude and other key variables. This man told me he was dying of cancer. His daughter had cancer. He was the only member of his unit that chuted into the toxic bomb cloud still alive.
US soldier guinea pigs watching the first atomic bomb test
Needless to say I invited him to speak and listened closely as he warned us never to trust NASA safety claims when they launch nuclear devices into space.
This is a history Washington wants us to forget
I recently heard Vladimir Putin say that some number of young people in Japan these days think it was Russia that dropped the atomic bombs on Hiroshima and Nagasaki. This mis-education is being done to turn the Japanese people into an uncritical US ally as the US-NATO make their aggressive military moves on China and Russia.
We can’t let the world ever forget the true story of August 6 & 9, 1945.
What kind of nation would do these terrible things?
Never forget!
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
On August 6, 40 terrorists in Deraa set up a booby-trapped ambush on seven soldiers of the Syrian Arab Army (SAA). Two SAA soldiers were killed, and five were injured as a result of the battle. They put up a heroic fight to defend themselves despite overwhelming odds.
Syrian state media, reported that there is an ISIS leader in hiding in downtown Deraa. The presence of a high ranking ISIS official may be one of the reasons the terrorists are refusing to vacate the city and allow for searches to ensure the safety of the civilians.
While negotiations were ongoing between the terrorists and the Russians, the terrorists kidnapped over 60 soldiers of the SAA, but later the Russians negotiated the soldiers release. The Syrian government is insisting on having all individual and light weapons surrendered by the terrorists, but they have so far rejected the demands.
Late last month, terrorists in Deraa fired rockets at Red Crescent workers while they were assisting locals in evacuating.
Deraa situation
Deraa, is known in the west as the ‘birthplace of the Syrian revolution’, is home to 40,000 residents, and was a terrorist stronghold until 2018.
As of May 26, over 50 assassinations have taken place, killing civilians, soldiers of the SAA, and government supporters, who were killed by terrorists using machine guns while riding motor cycles.
A current deal is being worked on between the terrorists and the Russian negotiators. The terrorists are being asked to give up small and mid-weight weapons, and the SAA will man checkpoints inside Deraa to maintain law and order. The road between Deraa to the suburbs is to be opened, but the deal was rejected so far. However, a number of terrorists surrendered to the SAA and were given amnesty in return of an oath to cease fighting the SAA.
There was a previous 2018 peace deal in Deraa, brokered by the Russians, but it was violated by the terrorists continuously, with snipers and killings. Several days ago, at midnight, the terrorists booby-trapped the Ba’ath Party headquarters in Diaal, a city in Deraa province. There were no injuries, but property damage was reported.
Al-Balad, an area in Deraa, was blockaded by the SAA forces on June 25 after the terrorists resisted an order to surrender their light weapons and allow the SAA forces to search houses in the area, which is populated by 40,000 people.
The proposed deal would have allowed thousands of terrorist and civilians safe passage to Idlib. The SAA recaptured Deraa from terrorists in 2018.
Syrian governmental institutions have returned, but the SAA still has not been deployed across the whole province, and bombings and assassinations carried out by terrorists have since become routine.
The “White Helmets” called on the United Nations Security Council (UNSC) and the international community “to take urgent action” in Deraa. The “White Helmets” have only operated in terrorist controlled areas in Syria. They have become linked with Al Qaeda and various terrorist groups. While Syrians across the country have suffered at the hands of terrorist groups, the “White Helmets” were never there to help them. They are a selective group, tied only to the various terrorist groups, while being supported by western donors, and claiming Hollywood video film awards.
Who are these terrorists, who is supporting them?
Ismat al-Absi, is a Free Syrian Army (FSA) leader in Deraa, currently residing in the northern countryside of Aleppo, which is under the occupation of Turkey, and home to the Turkish supported mercenaries, FSA, who have been sent to fight in Libya, and are scheduled to be the protection force for the Afghanistan international airport.
When the SAA freed Deraa in 2018, many FSA stayed in Deraa, instead of evacuating to Idlib. These are the terrorists now who are holding 40,000 people as hostages in their fight against the SAA.
In the past, injured FSA terrorists in Deraa were treated in Israeli hospitals, and former Prime Minister Netanyahu personally visited the fighters and pledged support.
Turkey is also supporting the FSA: in Idlib, the Aleppo countryside, and in Deraa. The spokesperson for the terrorists, Muneef al-Zaim, recently called on Turkey to be their guarantor there.
‘The day before Deraa’
Al-Balad, the area in Deraa currently in crisis, is considered to be the birthplace of the Syrian ‘uprising’ in March 2011, and part of the ‘Arab Spring’. Much has been written about the origins of the crisis, and whether it was a revolution, a civil-war, or a sectarian war. An article was written titled ‘The day before Deraa’ and has become the definitive explanation of the origins of the Syrian conflict. The conflict began in Deraa, which was a small, insignificant agricultural city on the Jordanian border. The fact it was on an international border, and one with an American military base nearby, was the reason the crisis was born in Deraa, instead of the capital, or the most populated city in Syria, Aleppo. The Syrian crisis was a US-NATO planned attack on the Syrian people, to destroy the country and infrastructure, to effect ‘regime change’, and to install a Muslim Brotherhood leader at the helm in Damascus. Their plan worked in Egypt, but only lasted one year, and the people went back to the streets and revolted against the US supported Muslim Brotherhood.
Tunisia today is the latest rejection of the Muslim Brotherhood, and the US is calling the situation a ‘coup’ because they support the Muslim Brothhood party, Ennahda.
The Russian role in negotiations
Russian President Vladimir Putin recently sent his special representative Alexander Zorin to Syria, who met with Ahmed Awda, who had signed the 2018 peace deal.
On July 28, a meeting was held between the negotiating committee and representatives of the 8th Brigade of the 5th Corps affiliated with Russia.
The Russian Defense Ministry’s Center for Reconciliation of Opposing Sides and Control over the Movement of Refugees in the Syrian Arab Republic was established in February 2016. Its tasks include the signing of agreements of illegal armed groups and individual settlements joining the ceasefire, as well as coordinating the delivery of humanitarian aid.
Ultimately, the Syrian government will prevail. Their strategy of peaceful negotiations, with the help of Russian negotiators, has proved a successful strategy across Syria. It is possible the terrorists will choose to peacefully be transported to Idlib, which was the original deal offered, but refused by many. The civilian population, held hostage, cannot be forgotten. All efforts to free the civilians from the control and oppression of the terrorists must be considered. In the end, it may be decided a military operation is the only way to free Deraa.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
The PCR test is an outrageous fraud that was never meant to detect a virus.
The main goal of this pandemic fraud was to vaccinate the entire world and that seems to be working out quite well for these evil globalist criminals.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Numerous films, some of them based on novels, feature nuclear war, its potential impacts, and the extreme threat these weapons pose. One of the first was Godzilla, a 1954 Japanese production re-released in the US two years later with Raymond Burr in a key role. The title monster is widely considered an analogy to the nuclear weapons dropped on Japan. But films about the danger of nuclear weapons actually began to appear years before with a fictionalized docudrama. The Beginning of the End (1947) focused on the Manhattan Project and nuclear bombing of Hiroshima — which had happened only two years earlier.
The mutant monster genre’s beginnings coincided with the McCarthy era, a time when paranoia wasn’t an unreasonable response to what was happening. Nuclear-spawned giant Ants prowled the Los Angeles sewers in Them, while The Beast from 20,000 Fathoms, with special effects by Ray Harryhausen, revolved around a dinosaur thawed from frozen hibernation by a atomic test in the Arctic Circle.
The most effective film of that genre’s early years may have been The Incredible Shrinking Man, based on a novel and featuring groundbreaking effects. The 1957 movie opens with the irradiation of Scott, an average guy vacationing with his wife when a strange mist covers him. This sets off his gradual descent into a very different and threatening world. Scott does ultimately experience an existential liberation at sub-atomic size. But the Japanese fisherman whose irradiation by a bomb test inspired the story wasn’t as lucky.
The treatment of nuclear weapon detonation turned more serious as the decade ended with On the Beach. Based on a popular 1957 novel, the film, released in 1959, was an effective melodrama with A-list stars that followed the travails of nuclear war survivors in Australia as they confront death and the end of humanity.
In the 1960s, films began to seriously address how a nuclear conflict could start and how people might react. In Panic in the Year Zero (1961), starring Ray Milland, a family on a camping trip flees a nearby nuclear attack, encountering looters and other violent people as society breaks down. Released the same year, The Day the Earth Caught Fire suggests that nuclear tests could throw the Earth off course. The planet is doomed unless scientists figure out how to reverse the change. Spoiler: the outcome isn’t clear. The final sequence shows two newspaper front pages. One declares “World Saved,” the other “World Doomed.”
Two of the most enduring films about the possibility of ending up in a nuclear war by accident were released in 1964. Both were based on novels. Fail-Safe takes an intellectual approach, chronicling how politicians, scientists and the military handle the accidental bombing of Moscow when command and control systems fail. To save the rest of the world, the US president, sympathetically portrayed by Henry Fonda, decides to balance the scale of tragedy by nuking New York.
Dr. Strangelove (or How I Learned to Stop Worrying and Love the Bomb), directed by Stanley Kubrick, opted for black comedy. Based loosely on Red Alert, a 1958 novel, it features the idea that a hypothetical Doomsday Machine would be beyond human control. It also suggests that sexual and mental problems could put the fate of humanity in the hands of one deranged general.
Around the same time, the James Bond franchise was launched, and subsequently used the threat posed by nuclear weapons falling into the “wrong” hands as the super-spy’s motivation in ten films over three decades. Some focus on theft or threatened use by criminal groups, others on a showdown between the superpowers. Bond always saves the planet, of course. But Polaris missiles are used to destroy a stolen nuclear sub in The Spy Who Loved Me. Defying both science and reason, only the bad guys are killed.
In Goldfinger (1964), the gold-obsessed villain plots the collapse of the West’s economy to enrich himself, with Chinese and North Korean accomplices, by irradiating the gold reserve at Fort Knox. In Octopussy (1977), another installment with convenient Cold War villains, a renegade Soviet general joins forces with Afghan and Indian smugglers to derail disarmament talks and invade Western Europe by detonating a nuke at a US base in Germany. In Goldeneye (1995), the threat is a hypothetical nuclear satellite weapon that can disable electronics with an EMP attack.
Other Bond films with plots involving nuclear weapons include Thunderball (1965), You Only Live Twice (1967), Diamonds Are Forever (1971), The Spy Who Loved Me (1977), Tomorrow Never Dies (1997) and The World is Not Enough (1999). By this time, using nuclear weapons as a plot device had become so common that Mike Myers’ spy spoof Austin Powers turned it into a punchline. Assessing various criminal options, Bond-like villain Dr. Evil eventually settles on the obvious. “Let’s just do what we always do,” he proposes, “steal a nuclear bomb and hold the world to ransom.”
Fact-based accounts have been more rare. But the Manhattan Project was soberly dramatized in Fat Man and Little Boy and Day One, both released in 1989, while The Missiles of October (1974)and Thirteen Days (2000) explore the 1962 Cuban missile crisis. In 1983, The Day After, made for television, sparked a national debate by realistically showing the effects of nuclear weapons. It depicts both how a war could happen and the potentially devastating aftermath.
Nuclear films by the decade
The 1950s also included Split Second (1953), in which an escaped killer and his partners hold people hostage in a ghost town slated to be destroyed by a nuclear bomb; and The Atomic Kid (1954), focusing on a man in the danger zone of a nuclear test when the bomb is activated.
Beyond Dr. Strangelove and Fail-Safe, the 1960s featured Ladybug, Ladybug (1963), also set during the 1962 Cuban missile crisis; A Carol for Another Christmas (1964), in which the Ghost of Christmas Future provides a tour of the ruins of a once-great civilization that looks like Hiroshima; and The Bedford Incident (1965), based on a 1961 novel, depicting a stand off in the North Atlantic between a destroyer and a Soviet submarine caught violating Greenland’s territorial waters. The novel ends with the destroyer accidentally firing a missile at the submarine, and the Soviet submarine responding with four nuclear torpedoes. In the film, the final image is a mushroom cloud.
The War Game (1965), a BBC release, was a mockumentary about the effects of nuclear war on England after a conventional war escalates. And let’s not forget the Planet of the Apesfranchise, which also launched in the 1960s. It is set in a future ruled by apes, who take over after a nuclear war destroys mankind. Beginning as a novel, the original film spawned four sequels, and more recent remakes that shift the cause of the ape takeover to biotechnology.
Battle Beneath the Earth (1967) posits a discovery that Communist China, using futuristic vehicles, has tunneled under the US to place nuclear bombs in strategic locations, resulting in a struggle to foil the plan. In the black humor category there is The Bed Sitting Room (1969), an absurdist, post-apocalyptic, satire set in the ruins of London and featuring John Lennon.
The 1970s started slowly, but eventually produced some memorable additions. Two were released in 1977. Damnation Alley, adapted from a Roger Zelazny short story, features a chilling launch and destruction sequence. After the surprise attack, it follows the efforts of some California survivors to reach another group in New York. And Twilight’s Last Gleaming follows a renegade Air Force general who escapes from a military prison and takes over an ICBM silo near Montana. Once there he threatens to launch missiles and jump-start World War III unless the president reveals a secret document about the Vietnam War.
Two years later The China Syndrome had a significant real world impact. A gripping drama about the dangers of nuclear power, it’s effect was intensifed by a real-life nuclear accident at the Three Mile Island plant only weeks after the film opened. Jane Fonda plays a TV reporter who personally witnesses the risk of a meltdown (known as the “China syndrome”) at a local nuclear plant. Tragedy is averted by a quick-thinking but troubled engineer. The film suggests that corporate greed and cost-cutting have led to potentially deadly faults in the plant’s construction. Less serious but equally popular, the Mad Max franchise also began in 1979, leading to four more film in which a heavily-armed loner patrols a bleak post-nuclear wasteland.
The 1980s could be called the golden age of nuclear movies, marked by dozens of popular productions. The decade began with two memorable 1982 films. The Children’s Story, based on a 1960 short story by James Clavell and originally aired on TV, is a short film depicting the indoctrination of an elementary school classroom by a new teacher when a totalitarian government takes over the country. Another is The Atomic Cafe, which effectively explores 1940s and 1950s government propaganda films that were supposed to reassure audiences that nuclear weapons weren’t a threat to their safety.
The next year was even bigger. Special Bulletin was a made-for-TV movie about anti-nuclear activists who detonate a home-made nuke in South Carolina. It’s shot in a live breaking news style. War Games featured a young computer hacker who nearly starts World War III when he inadvertently breaks into a fictional NORAD supercomputer to play the latest video games. In The Dead Zone a teacher, played by Christopher Walken, acquires psychic powers, then learns that a political candidate, portrayed by pre-West Wing Martin Sheen, will order a nuclear strike at some point in the future. Testament, from PBS, depicts the after-effects of a nuclear war in a town near San Francisco. Silkwood, inspired by the true story of Karen Silkwood, who died in a suspicious car accident, dramatizes her struggle to investigate wrongdoing at the Kerr-McGee plutonium plant where she worked. And Barefoot Gen is an anime film depicting the terror of the Hiroshima bombing and its aftermath from the perspective of a child.
Nuclear paranoia went big time in 1984 with the start of The Terminator franchise, featuring a post-apocalyptic future in which artificial intelligence becomes self-aware, identifies humans as a threat, and uses the world’s nuclear arsenal to destroy mankind. All of James Cameron films from 1986 to 1994 featured nuclear explosions. Just as paranoid but more right-wing,Red Dawn revolves around an invasion and occupation of the US by Soviet, Nicaraguan and Cuban forces after a surprise limited nuclear strike.
The docudrama Countdown to Looking Glass dramatizes an international incident, the breakdown of diplomacy, and the escalation of international tensions leading up to a nuclear crisis. One Night Stand, an Australian film, focuses on four teenagers in the Sydney Opera House when news breaks of a US-Soviet conflict in Europe that goes nuclear — first in Europe, and soon in Australia. And Threads, a 1984-85 BBC production based on a British government exercise, shows the effects of an all-out nuclear war on the town of Sheffield.
In 1986, Manhattan Project wasn’t actually about the bomb’s invention, but instead about how, using stolen plutonium, a high school student builds an atomic bomb for a science class project. Two other significant productions that year were When the Wind Blows,an animated film about an elderly British couple in a post-nuclear war world, and The Sacrifice, a philosophical Swedish dramaabout nuclear war.
In 1987, The Fourth Protocol, Frederick Forsythe’s 1984 novel, was adapted for film. It follows a plot by extreme Soviet elements to encourage unilateral British disarmament. Meanwhile, they smuggle the components of a tactical nuclear bomb into the country for eventual detonation near a US nuclear base the week before an election. Other 1987 releases include Project X, dealing with the testing of lethal exposures to nuclear radiation on how specially-trained chimpanzees perform in computerized flight simulators — based on a real Air Force biomedical research program; Amazing Grace and Chuck, in which a 12-year-old boy becomes anxious after seeing a Minuteman missile on a school field trip and protests by refusing to play baseball; and Superman IV: The Quest for Peace, in which the Man of Steel rounds up all the nuclear weapons and hurls them into the Sun, resulting in unintended consequences.
As the decade ended, Miracle Mile (1988) followed a musician who visits the famous Los Angeles shopping zone, gets a wrong number phone call, and overhears a conversation about an imminent nuclear attack. Struggling against fear, denial and panic, he scrambles to save himself and a woman he just met.
Despite the collapse of the Soviet Union, By Dawn’s Early Light(1990) dramatized an accidental limited nuclear exchange between the two Superpowers after a “false-flag” attack on Soviet territory. Rogue Soviet military officials frame NATO in order to spark a full-blown nuclear war. Based on Tom Clancy’s 1984 bestseller, The Hunt for Red October was released the same year, and involves a Soviet naval captain who wants to defect with his crew and his country’s most advanced nuclear missile submarine.
A few years later Matinee, which is mainly a comedy, revisits the Cuban missile crisis, showing the fears of Americans who think they are about to meet their doom. As the Cold War faded, films like Crimson Tide (1995) and Broken Arrow (1996) turned back to the threats posed by human error and private greed. In the former, the problem is mutiny on a nuclear sub; in the latter, it’s the theft of two thermonuclear weapons by a rogue bomber pilot. The Peacemaker (1997) combines emerging concerns about rogue Russian officers with access to nukes and Eastern European terrorists who want the US to suffer as they have. In Deterrence (1999) the possibility of dropping of a nuclear bomb on Baghdad is dramatized.
In the last 20 years, the threats dramatized on film have ranged from terrorists to tornados. In The Sum of All Fears (2002), also based on a Tom Clancy novel, neo-Nazis attempt to spark a nuclear war between the US and Russia by detonating a nuke during a baseball game attended by the president. In Dirty War (2004) radioactive material is smuggled into England, turned into several dirty bombs, and detonated in London. Dirty bombs are also detonated in Right at Your Door (2007), a thriller set in Los Angeles after their use. On the other hand, it’s just a close call in Atomic Twister (2002) when a automated nuclear power plant is in the path of a tornado.
A few recent films have revisited actual events. K-19: The Widowmaker (2002) covers the actual Soviet submarine nuclear accident, and Chernobyl (2019), an HBO mini-series, details the 1986 disaster. Others opt to speculate. In The Divide (2011), survivors of a nuclear attack struggle to survive in the basement of their apartment building as fears and dwindling supplies undermine their behavior and relationships. In Outside the Wire (2021), a near future story, a drone pilot sent into a war zone must work with an android officer to stop a nuclear attack.
Nuclear weapons even play a role in modern superhero sagas. All of Gotham City is held hostage in The Dark Knight Rises (2012), part of the recent Batman series, when mercenaries take control of an armed neutron bomb. And in Watchmen (2009), based on a DC comic book, a super-powered Dr. Manhattan acts as America’s nuclear deterrent in an alternative 1985, while a Soviet invasion of Afghanistan takes the world to the brink of nuclear conflict.
Some things never change.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
ISBN Number: 978-0-9737147-5-3
Year: 2012
Pages: 102 Print Edition: $10.25 (+ shipping and handling) PDF Edition: $6.50 (sent directly to your email account!)
Michel Chossudovsky is Professor of Economics at the University of Ottawa and Director of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG), which hosts the critically acclaimed website www.globalresearch.ca . He is a contributor to the Encyclopedia Britannica. His writings have been translated into more than 20 languages.
Reviews
“This book is a ‘must’ resource – a richly documented and systematic diagnosis of the supremely pathological geo-strategic planning of US wars since ‘9-11’ against non-nuclear countries to seize their oil fields and resources under cover of ‘freedom and democracy’.” –John McMurtry, Professor of Philosophy, Guelph University
“In a world where engineered, pre-emptive, or more fashionably “humanitarian” wars of aggression have become the norm, this challenging book may be our final wake-up call.” -Denis Halliday, Former Assistant Secretary General of the United Nations
Michel Chossudovsky exposes the insanity of our privatized war machine. Iran is being targeted with nuclear weapons as part of a war agenda built on distortions and lies for the purpose of private profit. The real aims are oil, financial hegemony and global control. The price could be nuclear holocaust. When weapons become the hottest export of the world’s only superpower, and diplomats work as salesmen for the defense industry, the whole world is recklessly endangered. If we must have a military, it belongs entirely in the public sector. No one should profit from mass death and destruction. –Ellen Brown, author of ‘Web of Debt’ and president of the Public Banking Institute
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Too many people believe the Disney version of what’s happening in Syria — gallant America riding a white horse to save the poor children of Syria from a brutal dictator. The truth about Syria is that the western elites have been trying to overthrow the government for many decades. Everything else is just drama for public consumption.
Here are some links to official CIA documents, WikiLeaks emails, secretly recorded audio tapes, and inadvertent truth-telling from media/political elites that demonstrate the ruthless regime change plans in Syria that involve many countries including the US, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Turkey etc.
1956CIA plot to overthrow the Syrian government (link)
1983 CIA document and plans to obliterate Syria to enable pipeline (link)
1986 CIA document discussing Syria and role of Muslim Brotherhood in a possible civil war fueled by Sunni-Shiite conflict (link)
2001: Wesley Clark told that USA will take out 7 countries in 5 years (Libya, Syria etc.) (link)
2005: CNN Interview. Christiane Amanpour tells Assad that the western governments are plotting a regime change in Syria (link)
2006: State Dept cable: Detailed discussion of various strategies to enable regime change in Syria (link)
2005-2007: US funded opposition leaders within Syria to defeat Assad in the 2007 election. US also funded anti-Assad Muslim Brotherhood groups based out of Washington! (Muslim Brotherhood is banned in Syria) (link)
2009: US and UK spend millions to start a satellite TV channel (“Barada TV”) to broadcast anti-Assad programs all over Syria (link)
2009: State Dept Email: Saudi Arabia is worried that a Shiite crescent is turning into a full moon (referring to a possible Iran-Iraq-Syria-Lebanon coalition). Saudi Arabia, therefore, wanted to remove Assad and turn Syria into a Sunni country (link)
2009: State Dept Cable: Saudi Arabia is the #1 source of funding of terrorismworldwide (link)
2011: Special Ops from US/UK/Turkey were inside Syria, training the rebels (link)
2011: Weapons shipped from Libya to Syria after the fall of Gaddafi (link)
2012: CIA spending $100,000 per “moderate rebel” for training to fight in Syria (link). $1 billion per year in training terrorists.
2012 State Dept Email: Conquest of Syria means a weakened Iran and this is important for Israel (link)
2012: State Dept Email: Use Saudi Arabia, Qatar and Turkey to arm/train rebels (link)
2012: Saudi Arabia demands that Assad be overthrown using all means available (link)
2012: Hillary Clinton receives an email: “Al Qaeda is on our side.” (link)
2012: DIA (Pentagon) memo: Al Qaeda, Muslim Brotherhood and Salafists (Wahhabi extremist Sunnis) are the main forces trying to overthrow Assad (link)
2012: NY Times and others report that most US weapons sent to Syria were ending up in the hands of Jihadists (link)
2012: Experienced Al Qaeda leaders from all over the world go to Syria to overthrow the government (link)
2011-2013: 160 military cargo planes full of US weapons were sent to Syria (Sent from Saudi Arabia and Qatar to Turkey; then sneaked into Syria across the border). (link)
2011-2017: 10 links that show collusion between “Moderate Rebels” (FSA) and Al Qaeda or ISIS (link)
2014: Hillary Clinton writes about Saudi Arabia and Qatar funding ISIS (link)
2014: 4-Star General Martin Dempsey – Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff – said during a Senate hearing, “I know many Arab allies who fund ISIS.” (link)
2014: Oops, USA accidentally drops weapons right in ISIS’ hands (link)
2015: Top ISIS commander used to be a “star pupil” of CIA in the country of Georgia (link)
2015: By 2015, more than 30,000 foreign terrorists were fighting in Syria. This is not a civil war! (link)
2015: NATO Commander Gen. Wesley Clark said, “our friends and allies funded ISIS.” (link)
2015: Joe Biden says Saudi Arabia and Qatar arming/funding Al Qaeda in Syria (link)
2015: Turkey-ISIS connections: oil and arms trade (link)
2015: Amnesty report: Most ISIS’ weapons are from America! (link)
2016: Israeli Defense Minister, Ya’alon: “We prefer ISIS to Assad in Syria.” (link)
2016: Israel’s Intelligence Chief, Herzi Halevy: “We will do everything to make sure ISIS does not lose in Syria.” (link)
2016: Oops, I did it again! US drops tons of weapons into ISIS’ hands again. By mistake, of course! (link)
2016: Al Qaeda (Al Nusra) leader brags about getting weapons from the US (link)
2016: White Helmets – supposed to be neutral volunteers not funded by any governments – are actually found to have received more than $100 million from US and UKgovernments (link,link of Boris Johnson talking about funding)
2016: Presidential candidate Evan McMullintweetedthat his role in CIA (in 2011-2012)was to convince Al Qaeda in Syria/Iraq to work with the U.S. (link)
2016: John Kerry in a leaked audio recording explains how the US trains/arms the opposition and was hoping to use ISIS to force Assad into negotiation (link)
2016: Chapter 10 of the book “WikiLeaks Files” that explains the efforts behind regime change in Syria (link)
2017 & 2015: Thomas FriedmanofThe New York Timeswrote two pieces asserting thatISIS is better than Assad(2015 article,2017 article).
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Featured image is from World Affairs
Order Mark Taliano’s Book “Voices from Syria” directly from Global Research.
Mark Taliano combines years of research with on-the-ground observations to present an informed and well-documented analysis that refutes the mainstream media narratives on Syria.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
s
From the start of December 2018, with trade war tensions with China growing, and through the entire COVID-19 crisis, Meng Wanzhou, the chief financial officer of the telecom giant Huawei, has been trapped in Canada and waiting for the day she might be extradited to the U.S.
Meng was a notable figure within China. She is the daughter of Ren Zhegfei, the founder of Huawei technologies and the 83rd richest person in the world. The Chinese public did not exactly take the matter lightly and are fighting fiercely for the release of their caged bird. The detention of two Canadians just days after Meng’s arrest, Michael Kovrig and Michael Spavor, is seen by many western analysts as retaliatory.[1][2]
The Office of Canadian Prime Minister on the other hand stated that he was obliged according to the “rule of law” to arrest this person. The Right Honourable Justin Trudeau said Canada had a extradition treaty with the U.S. and was forced to act according to standard legal protocol. But the China Daily newspaper published an opinion piece stating Canada was acting “as a loyal adherent of the U.S. in the Meng detention drama.” [3]
Meanwhile, opinions in Canada suggest that favourable views of China have plummeted from 48 per cent to 14 per cent. Most would prohibit Huawei’s use in the nation’s 5G roll-out, and the vast majority also believe China has not told the complete truth about COVID-19.[4]
Worse, anti-Asian violence is on the rise. The Guardian reports that in Vancouver, anti-Asian hate crimes have gone up 717 per cent over the previous year.[5]
Nevertheless, peace communities in Canada disagreed with the stance taken by Trudeau and think it is about time Meng Wanzhou was set free. Consequently, Cyrus Janssen hosted a panel discussion in May of 2021 outlining the broader context. The Global Research News Hour took samples of the talk and made it available for broadcast this week.
The Cross-Canada Campaign to Free Meng Wanzhou was sponsored by the Canada China Council for Cooperation and Development, the Canadian Foreign Policy Institute, the Canadian Peace Congress, the Hamilton Coalition to Stop the War, and the International Action Center.
Christopher Black is an international criminal lawyer based in Toronto. He is known for a number of high-profile war crimes cases and recently published his novel Beneath the Clouds. He writes essays on international law, politics and world events, especially for the online magazine “New Eastern Outlook”.
Sheila Xiao is a second generation Chinese-American, a researcher, data scientist and community organizer, and co-founder of the group Pivot to Peace.
Cyrus Janssen is an international business consultant, entrepreneur, speaker and American expat. He now considers Shanghai, Hong Kong and Vancouver his home during the past 13 years.
CIXX 106.9 FM, broadcasting from Fanshawe College in London, Ontario. It airs Sundays at 6am.
WZBC 90.3 FM in Newton Massachusetts is Boston College Radio and broadcasts to the greater Boston area. The Global Research News Hour airs during Truth and Justice Radio which starts Sunday at 6am.
Campus and community radio CFMH 107.3fm in Saint John, N.B. airs the Global Research News Hour Fridays at 7pm.
CJMP 90.1 FM, Powell River Community Radio, airs the Global Research News Hour every Saturday at 8am.
Caper Radio CJBU 107.3FM in Sydney, Cape Breton, Nova Scotia airs the Global Research News Hour starting Wednesday afternoon from 3-4pm.
Johna Baylon and Leyland Cecco (may 23, 2021), Attacks make Vancouver ‘anti-Asian hate crime capital of North America’, The Guardian; https://www.theguardian.com/world/2021/may/23/vancoucer-anti-asian-hate-crimes-increase
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
In the latest twist in the troubled turmoil saga swirling around Haiti, the president, Jovenel Moïse was assassinated.
It happened around 1am local time on July 7. According to Haitian police, more than 30 people were involved in the assassination. They stormed the house, tied up guards and housekeeping staff, and shot the president twelve times with high calibre bullets, once directly into the forehead. [1]
Moïse of course was no saint himself. He had ruled by decree since early in 2020. Even though his term was over on February 7 of this year, he stayed in power anyway until February of 2022, much to the chagrin of the people. Now with this assassination, political uncertainty in expected to increase.[2]
But there is another picture of the island country we desperately need to see. The Haitian people are less troubled by their picks as leaders than by the role of the United States ensuring that this country will continue to be occupied and ensure that nothing upsets the lucrative economic relationship that has served them so well.
And the year this occupation was finally achieved was in 2004, when the U.S., Canada, and France orchestrated a coup against the people’s president, Jean Bertrand Aristide.
All “Black Lives Matter” rhetoric to the contrary, these great powers have continued to thrive at the expense of a devastated public that more than 200 years ago overthrew the slave-masters on the island.
This week, on the Global Research News Hour, we invite the listeners to attend a panel discussion talking about the movie Haiti Betrayed. They will discuss the various military, economic and other ways the U.S. and Canada and other major powers are continuing to benefit from the misery of the people. The conversation was held on February 28 (Black History month) and was moderated by Canadian Foreign Policy Institute director Bianca Mugyenyi.
Elaine Brière is a Canadian filmmaker and photojournalist. She crafted the film Haiti Betrayed, on the role of Canada in the 2004 coup d’état in Haiti, was released in late 2019. Her first documentary, Bitter Paradise: The Sell-out of East Timor, won Best Political Documentary at the 1997 HOT DOCS! festival and Production Excellence award at Seattle Women in Film in 1998.
Jean Saint-Vil was born and raised in Port-au-Prince, Haiti and is currently based in Ottawa. He has been an activist who helped to found the Canada Haiti Action Network. He has been featured as political analyst by Canadian radio and television as well as by Embassy Magazine, ZNet and Rogers Ottawa Television.
Kira Paulemon graduated from SUNY Plattsburgh where she majored in Political Science and Latin American Studies with a minor in Spanish. She has a strong interest in human rights, racial and social justice, and US foreign policy in Latin America, particularly in Haiti which is where she’s from.
Brian Concannon is a human rights lawyer and foreign policy advocate. He is the Executive Director of Project Blueprint, which works for a human rights-based US foreign policy by bringing the perspectives of people abroad impacted by US policies into policy discussions and advocacy.
Bianca Mugyenyi is an activist, a journalist, and the director of the Canadian Foreign Policy Institute.
CIXX 106.9 FM, broadcasting from Fanshawe College in London, Ontario. It airs Sundays at 6am.
WZBC 90.3 FM in Newton Massachusetts is Boston College Radio and broadcasts to the greater Boston area. The Global Research News Hour airs during Truth and Justice Radio which starts Sunday at 6am.
Campus and community radio CFMH 107.3fm in Saint John, N.B. airs the Global Research News Hour Fridays at 7pm.
CJMP 90.1 FM, Powell River Community Radio, airs the Global Research News Hour every Saturday at 8am.
Caper Radio CJBU 107.3FM in Sydney, Cape Breton, Nova Scotia airs the Global Research News Hour starting Wednesday afternoon from 3-4pm.
Santiago Pérezand and Anthony Harrup (July 23, 2021), ‘Haiti President Assassinated: What We Know About Killing of Jovenel Moïse’, the Wall Street Journal; https://www.wsj.com/articles/haiti-president-assassination-11625665343
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
John Tierney, a former reporter for The New York Times, looks back over the pandemic, providing a timeline of the media-induced viral panic that led to censorship and suppression of scientific research on an unprecedented scale.
Experts who spoke out against the official narrative were attacked and accused of endangering lives by questioning lockdowns.
Numerous research journals refused to publish the results of studies that featured data questioning lockdowns, masks and other COVID policies.
Certain states have stood out for their refusal to buy into the draconian public health measures that were adopted throughout much of the U.S. — Florida is chief among them and has a COVID mortality rate that’s lower than the national average.
The “crisis crisis,” or the ‘incessant state of alarm fomented by journalists and politicians,’ is one reason why so many government, academic and policy leaders could support rampant censorship and suppress scientific debate for so long, all while propagating panic.
*
Now that we’re more than a year into the pandemic, it’s crystal clear that the panic that ensued was unnecessary and the draconian measures put into place for public health were unwarranted and harmful.
John Tierney, a former reporter for The New York Times, looked back over the pandemic, providing a timeline of the media-induced viral panic that led to censorship and suppression of scientific research on an unprecedented scale.
In his article for City Journal, where he is a contributing editor, he explained that the “moral panic that swept the nation’s guiding institutions” during the pandemic was far more catastrophic than the viral pandemic itself.
Media-induced panic set off in March 2020
The panic was started by journalists beginning in March 2020, when the Imperial College COVID-19 Response Team released “Report 9” on the impact of nonpharmaceutical interventions (NPSs) to reduce deaths and health care demand from COVID-19.
The report’s computer model projected that intensive care units in the U.S. would be overrun, with 30 COVID-19 patients for every available bed, and 2.2 million dead by summer. They concluded that “epidemic suppression is the only viable strategy at the current time,” which led to lockdowns, business and school closures and population-wide social distancing. But as Tierney noted:
“What had originally been a limited lockdown — ‘15 days to slow the spread’ — became long-term policy across much of the United States and the world.
“A few scientists and public-health experts objected, noting that an extended lockdown was a novel strategy of unknown effectiveness that had been rejected in previous plans for a pandemic. It was a dangerous experiment being conducted without knowing the answer to the most basic question: Just how lethal is this virus?”
John Ioannidis, an epidemiologist at Stanford, was an early critic of the response, who argued that long-term lockdowns could cause more harm than good. Ioannidis came under intense fire after he and colleagues revealed that the COVID-19 fatality rate for those under the age of 45 is “almost zero,” and between the ages of 45 and 70, it’s somewhere between 0.05% and 0.3%.
In Santa Clara County, in particular, he and colleagues estimated that in late March 2020, the local COVID infection fatality rate was just 0.17%. “But merely by reporting data that didn’t fit the official panic narrative, they became targets,” Tierney explained. “… Mainstream journalists piled on with hit pieces quoting critics and accusing the researchers of endangering lives by questioning lockdowns.”
Journals refused to publish solid, anti-narrative research
The discrediting and censorship of researchers who spoke out against the official narrative — even if they included supportive data — became a common and alarming theme over the last year, one that extended to virtually every aspect of pandemic-related policy, including masks.
The “Danmask-19 Trial,” published Nov. 18, 2020, in the Annals of Internal Medicine, found that among mask wearers 1.8% (42 participants) ended up testing positive for SARS-CoV-2, compared to 2.1% (53) among controls. When they removed the people who reported not adhering to the recommendations for use, the results remained the same — 1.8% (40 people), which suggests adherence makes no significant difference.
Initially, numerous research journals refused to publish the results, which called widespread mask mandates into question. Tierney said:
“When Thomas Benfield, one of the researchers in Denmark conducting the first large randomized controlled trial of mask efficacy against COVID, was asked why they were taking so long to publish the much-anticipated findings, he promised them as ‘as soon as a journal is brave enough to accept the paper.’
“After being rejected by The Lancet, The New England Journal of Medicine and JAMA, the study finally appeared in the Annals of Internal Medicine, and the reason for the editors’ reluctance became clear: the study showed that a mask did not protect the wearer, which contradicted claims by the Centers for Disease Control and other health authorities.”
A similar experience was had by Dr. Stefan Baral, a Johns Hopkins epidemiologist with 350 publications, who wanted to publish a critique of lockdowns. It became the “first time in my career that I could not get a piece placed anywhere,” he told Tierney.
Harvard epidemiologist Martin Kulldorff also wrote a paper against lockdowns and couldn’t get it published, noting that most other scientists he spoke to were also against them but were afraid to speak up.
Kulldorff and colleagues soon banded together to write the Great Barrington Declaration, which calls for “focused protection” of the elderly and those in nursing homes and hospitals, while allowing businesses and schools to remain open. Soon after, they too were attacked:
“They managed to attract attention but not the kind they hoped for. Though tens of thousands of other scientists and doctors went on to sign the declaration, the press caricatured it as a deadly ‘let it rip’ strategy and an ‘ethical nightmare’ from ‘COVID deniers’ and ‘agents of misinformation.’”
Physicians targeted, labeled heretics
Dr. Scott Atlas of Stanford’s Hoover Institution was another common target, as he also suggested that protections should be focused on nursing homes and lockdowns would take more lives than COVID-19. According to Tierney:
“When he joined the White House coronavirus task force, Bill Gates derided him as ‘this Stanford guy with no background’ promoting ‘crackpot theories.’ Nearly 100 members of Stanford’s faculty signed a letter denouncing his ‘falsehoods and misrepresentations of science,’ and an editorial in the Stanford Daily urged the university to sever its ties to Hoover.
“The Stanford faculty senate overwhelmingly voted to condemn Atlas’s actions as ‘anathema to our community, our values and our belief that we should use knowledge for good.’”
Similarly, the College of Physicians and Surgeons of Ontario, which regulates the practice of medicine in Ontario, issued a statement in May prohibiting physicians from making comments or providing advice that goes against the official narrative.
Actor Clifton Duncan shared the Orwellian message on Twitter, urging his followers to “Read this. Now. And then share it as much as you can.”
Because, equally as disturbing as the notion of publicly dictating to physicians what they’re allowed to say, is the fact that, as Duncan said, the statement has a glaring omission, “The health and well-being of the patient.”
Florida’s mortality rate from COVID lower than average
Certain states have stood out for their refusal to buy into the draconian public health measures that were adopted throughout much of the U.S. Florida is chief among them. After a spring 2020 lockdown, Florida business, schools and restaurants reopened, while mask mandates were rejected.
“If Florida had simply done no worse than the rest of the country during the pandemic, that would have been enough to discredit the lockdown strategy,” Tierney said, noting that the state acted as the control group in a natural experiment. The results speak for themselves:
“Florida’s mortality rate from COVID is lower than the national average among those over 65 and also among younger people, so that the state’s age-adjusted COVID mortality rate is lower than that of all but ten other states. And by the most important measure, the overall rate of ‘excess mortality’ (the number of deaths above normal), Florida has also done better than the national average.
“Its rate of excess mortality is significantly lower than that of the most restrictive state, California, particularly among younger adults, many of whom died not from COVID but from causes related to the lockdowns: cancer screenings and treatments were delayed, and there were sharp increases in deaths from drug overdoses and from heart attacks not treated promptly.”
The crisis crisis
It defies reason how so many government, academic and policy leaders could support rampant censorship and suppress scientific debate for so long, all while propagating panic. One of Tierney’s explanations is what he calls “the crisis crisis,” or the “incessant state of alarm fomented by journalists and politicians”:
“It’s a longstanding problem — humanity was supposedly doomed in the last century by the ‘population crisis’ and the ‘energy crisis’ — that has dramatically worsened with the cable and digital competition for ratings, clicks and retweets.
“To keep audiences frightened around the clock, journalists seek out Cassandras with their own incentives for fearmongering: politicians, bureaucrats, activists, academics and assorted experts who gain publicity, prestige, funding and power during a crisis.
“Unlike many proclaimed crises, an epidemic is a genuine threat, but the crisis industry can’t resist exaggerating the danger, and doomsaying is rarely penalized. Journalists kept highlighting the most alarming warnings, presented without context. They needed to keep their audience scared, and they succeeded.”
The politicization of research is another major issue that contributes to groupthink and the suppression of scientific debate in order to support one agenda. Meanwhile, while the media advertised that we’re all in this pandemic together, some were clearly more affected than others — namely the poor and less educated, who lost jobs while professionals were mostly able to keep working from the “safety” of their homes.
Children from disadvantaged families also suffered the most from year-long school closures. “The brunt was borne by the most vulnerable in America and the poorest countries of the world,” Tierney wrote, while many of the elitegot richer. The reality is, lockdowns have caused a great deal of harm, from delays in medical treatment and disrupted education to joblessness and drug overdoses, and for little, if any, benefit.
A new report by People’s Vaccine Alliance reveals how Big Pharma’s monopoly on COVID vaccines generated a massive increase in wealth for a handful of people. #TheDefenderhttps://t.co/xG4wYIvFBT
— Robert F. Kennedy Jr (@RobertKennedyJr) May 25, 2021
Data compiled by Pandemics ~ Data & Analytics (PANDA) also found no relationship between lockdowns and COVID-19 deaths per million people. The disease followed a trajectory of linear decline regardless of whether or not lockdowns were imposed. Yet, this is the type of information that has been censored from the beginning. As Tierney put it:
“This experience should be a lesson in what not to do, and whom not to trust. Do not assume that the media’s version of a crisis resembles reality. Do not count on mainstream journalists and their favorite doomsayers to put risks in perspective. Do not expect those who follow ‘the science’ to know what they’re talking about.”
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
“The Black Caucus has never – and should never – recover any vestige of dignity after putting the Democratic Party ahead of hundreds of thousands of poor and exiled Black people. They are still kissing Pelosi’s butt and draping her with kente cloth. Shameless and worthless, the vast bulk of the Black Caucus are totally in sync with their new leader’s racist politics and will not have to pretend to be soulmates with Old White Joe. In 2014, 80 percent of the Black Caucus voted to continue the Pentagon program to arm local police departments to the teeth, and in 2018 three out of four Blacks in the House supported making cops a “protected class.” They hate Black Lives Matter and its “defund the police” demand as much as Biden does, and have no solidarity with anyone except their own grasping, self-centered, hustling class.”
Funeral Services will be held on Saturday, August 7th at the Green Grove Cemetery located at 4062 Green Grove Road in Lumpkin, Georgia. The service begins at 12 p.m.
****************************************
Glen Ford, the outspoken Black Liberator and opponent of U.S. aggression from America’s streets to the devastated nations in the Global South, finally breathed his last on the morning of July 28, 2021. He was 71.
This is a sad month for many fans. His output on Black Agenda Report and on multiple news outlets prior to that media’s creation is distinct both in terms of its journalistic excellence and its devotion to the black radical tradition.
Circumstances that reward Black people that uphold racist positions whether it be typical law enforcement or supporting U.S. imperial policy and goals, or misrepresenting the true legacy of upheaval for which the very wealthy profit can definitely silence and strangle any remnant of resistance to the status quo. Consequently, Glen Ford and BAR definitely stood out for its content delivered with skill, intelligence and powerful repartee.
One notes in particular his remarks about Barack Obama as not the “lesser evil,” but rather the “more effective evil” neutralizing opposition to right wing policies. He also spoke often about the “Black Mis-Leadership Class,” people who form relationships with and support for the Democratic Party in return for achieving political gain:
“The Black supplicants are always betrayed, of course, but prefer a bad marriage to no relationship at all. Indeed, the Black misleaders and the Democrats have been locked in what Malcolm X would describe as a house Negro/slave master relationship for so long – certainly since the late Sixties – that the Black junior partner knows no other way to behave.”[2]
Global Research has long respected Ford’s work. We have featured a number of his essays on the site for over a decade. As a tribute, the Global Research News Hour does a full feature special on his life and legacy.
Beyond a written write-up of the man’s biography, we supply the voices of some of the people who had a friendly relationship with him who are now gutted by news of his death and share a bit of their stories with the wider public.
Ajamu Baraka is the national organizer of the Black Alliance for Peace and was the 2016 candidate for vice president on the Green Party ticket. Baraka serves on the Executive Committee of the U.S. Peace Council and leadership body of the United National Anti-War Coalition (UNAC). He is an editor and contributing columnist for the Black Agenda Report and contributing columnist for Counterpunch. He was recently awarded the US Peace Memorial 2019 Peace Prize and the Serena Shim award for uncompromised integrity in journalism.
Ann Garrison is an independent journalist based in the San Francisco Bay Area. In 2014, she received the Victoire Ingabire Umuhoza Democracy and Peace Prize for promoting peace through her reporting on conflict in the African Great Lakes Region. Please help support her work on Patreon. She can be reached on Twitter @AnnGarrison and at ann(at)anngarrison(dot)com.
Elias Amare is an activist originally from Eritrea. He helped organize the Eritrean Festival in Oakland in 2012 which hosted Glen Ford as a speaker.
Dahoud André is a Brooklyn-based radio host and organizer with the Committee to Mobilize Against Dictatorship in Haiti
CIXX 106.9 FM, broadcasting from Fanshawe College in London, Ontario. It airs Sundays at 6am.
WZBC 90.3 FM in Newton Massachusetts is Boston College Radio and broadcasts to the greater Boston area. The Global Research News Hour airs during Truth and Justice Radio which starts Sunday at 6am.
Campus and community radio CFMH 107.3fm in Saint John, N.B. airs the Global Research News Hour Fridays at 7pm.
CJMP 90.1 FM, Powell River Community Radio, airs the Global Research News Hour every Saturday at 8am.
Caper Radio CJBU 107.3FM in Sydney, Cape Breton, Nova Scotia airs the Global Research News Hour starting Wednesday afternoon from 3-4pm.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Patrick King has been trending on twitter due to a viral video where it is claimed that the province of Alberta rolled back on their lockdown measures as a result of Patrick’s court proceedings and this is not true as Patrick states. I Wasn’t Successful, No I did Not Win The Court Case”.
The outcome of this legal procedure was not in favour of Patrick King. Although successful in the court of public opinion, Patrick did not win the court case, at least NOT YET. .
The Alberta Government does not have a leg to stand on. The virus has not been isolated. They do not have the evidence.
There are a lot of people in Alberta and around the World who are Fighting against the Big Lie. Patrick King embodies the Truth.
Truth is a powerful peaceful weapon.
The covid narrative is very fragile. What we must achieve is to break the Big Lie.
Resist. They can’t arrest us all. They can’t keep all your kids home from school. They can’t keep every government building closed – although I’ve got a long list of ones they should.
He issued a subpoena to the Provincial Health Minister for proof that the so-called Covid-19 Virus exists, and they were forced to admit that they had no evidence whatsoever. The virus has never been isolated, and thus the government had no legal grounds to impose any of the punishing restrictions they have inflicted on society.
Part whistleblower, part human rights activist, Graham Brady is calling out his own government’s ill-advised Covid mitigation policies, originating from fear, rather than sound public health science.
The crowd represented a very wide cross-section of the local population. The Gilets Jaunes had already started this process of breaking down the old “left” and “right” political divisions in favour of a broad popular struggle against the power elite.
Alongside the around 4,000 that turned out in front of the Greek Parliament in Athens, police said several hundred people also took to the streets in the cities of Thessaloniki, Ioannina and Heraklion for the same reason.
Under cover of a non-existent ‘pandemic’, the global elite is now engaged in an elaborately planned endeavour to take complete control of human life and human society using measures clearly outlined in the literature related to ‘The Great Reset’, the fourth industrial revolution, transhumanism, eugenics and Cyber Polygon.
Will the Great Pandemic permanently unleash governments around the world? Covid-19 is enabling politicians to turn freedom from an individual right into a conditional bureaucratic dispensation.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
On August 3, the U.S. began its largest naval exercise in the last 40 years, the Large-Scale Exercise 2021. It involves five naval formations and the Marine Corps across 17 time zones. Another 25,000 soldiers are also participating in the exercise that will end on August 16. According to Stars and Stripes, the last comparable exercise of this magnitude was the 1981 NATO Ocean Venture.
The aim of Large-Scale Exercise 2021 (LSE) is to practice naval battles over a large area, as well as to identify, detect and destroy the enemy at sea, including the destruction of their nuclear weapons. It is a return to the Cold War and is meant to be a demonstration of power against Russia and China showing that the U.S. can carry out combat actions on several fronts simultaneously.
American strategists believe it is possible to defeat a sophisticated enemy on a single order with high-precision simultaneous blows from air, land, sea, space and cyberspace
Vice Admiral Gene Black, the commander of the 6th U.S. Fleet, said:
“LSE will test our commanders across the spectrum of naval warfare from the tactical to the strategic, integrating the Marine Corps to demonstrate the world-wide fleet’s ability to conduct coordinated operations from the open ocean to the littoral.”
However, serious doubts exist about the U.S.’ ability to dominate the Black, Mediterranean, South China, and East China Seas, as well as the world’s oceans. In terms of number and quality, the U.S. Navy is beginning to decline as they rank only fourth in the world for the total number of units (490) – the Chinese navy has 777 units, Russia 603 and North Korea 492. According to the Pentagon, there are 297 warships in the U.S. Navy, while China has 335 surface ships.
LSE 2021 is likely a reaction to the failed Pentagon-organized secret strategy simulation in October 2020. According to the deputy head of the staff committee, General John Hyten, last year’s war games “failed miserably” as a capable adversary could achieve “information dominance.” The Pentagon was not prepared to operate in a decentralized environment, especially as high-tech armed conflicts has altered the battlefield.
The head of the naval operations of the U.S. Navy, Admiral Michael Gilday, said yesterday that the LSE 2021 exercise is an opportunity to experiment with the concepts of war to learn lessons for the coming years.
“It’s to take this warfighting concept, which is quite frankly going to be foundational to everything that we buy, everything we invest in, and it’s going to inform how we’re going to fight,” he said.
The commander of the U.S. Pacific Fleet, Admiral Christopher Grady, said he intends to “advance the art and science of naval warfare” during LSE 2021 by evaluating experimental technologies, particularly data, weapons and platforms in places around the world that are disputed.
This sentiment was shared by the Chairman of the U.S. General Staff, General Mark Milley, who said on August 2 that in order to prepare for war, the U.S. must assimilate 50 new technologies in the next decade, including drones with artificial intelligence.
It is likely that U.S. military leaders believe that Russia and China will be intimidated by the volume of investments and level of training that American forces are undertaking across the globe. However, the U.S. is massively overstretched, especially since the cost of war against Afghanistan and Iraq since 2001 has chewed up trillions of dollars, contributing to the astronomical debt that the country has accumulated.
The Russian military showed Britain in June near Crimea that it is willing to take all necessary steps to protect its sovereignty against provocations and/or intentional violations. Albeit this was directly against Britain, it was undoubtedly a message to Washington as well. Similarly, the U.S. also engages in hostile actions in the South China and East China Seas in their attempt to pressure and contain China. In the same manner, China frequently has to demonstrate its resolve and determination to not be bullied and contained within their own neighborhood by a foreign power.
The LSE 2021 exercise is undoubtedly huge and attempts to portray the U.S. as still being the preeminent global power. However, with the U.S. wasting the advantage of a unipolar world by being bogged down in Iraq and Afghanistan, it has allowed China and Russia to develop economically and militarily after the catastrophic years of the 1980’s and 1990’s. Now, both countries can challenge the U.S.’ desire for complete global hegemony.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Paul Antonopoulos is an independent geopolitical analyst.
Featured image: Warships of the U.S. Navy. (Photo credit: U.S. Navy)
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
A double-blind Israeli study has concluded that Ivermectin, an inexpensive anti-parasitic widely used since 1981, reduces both the duration and infectiousness of Covid-19, according to the Jerusalem Post.
The study, conducted by Prof. Eli Schwartz, founder of the Center for Travel Medicine and Tropical Disease at Sheba Medical Center in Tel Hashomer, looked at some 89 eligible volunteers over the age of 18 who had tested positive for coronavirus, and were living in state-run Covid-19 hotels. After being divided into two groups, 50% received ivermectin, and 50% received a placebo. Each patient was given the drug for three days in a row, an hour before eating.
83% of participants were symptomatic at recruitment. 13.5% of patients had comorbidities of cardiovascular disease, diabetes, chronic respiratory disease, hypertension or cancer. The median age of the patients was 35, ranging from 20 to 71-years-old.
Results
Treatment was discontinued on the third day, and patients were monitored every two days thereafter. By day six, 72% of those treated with ivermectin tested negative for the virus, vs. 50% of those who received the placebo. Meanwhile, just 13% of ivermectin patients were able to infect others after six days compared to 50% of the placebo group – nearly four times as many.
Hospitalizations
Three patients in the placebo group were admitted to hospitals for respiratory symptoms, while one ivermectin patient was hospitalized for shortness of breath the day the study began– only to be discharged a day later and “sent back to the hotel in good condition,” according to the study.
“Our study shows first and foremost that ivermectin has antiviral activity,” said Schwartz, adding “It also shows that there is almost a 100% chance that a person will be noninfectious in four to six days, which could lead to shortening isolation time for these people. This could have a huge economic and social impact.”
The study, which appeared on the MedRxiv preprint server and has not yet been peer-reviewed. That said, Schwartz pointed out that similar studies – ‘though not all of them conducted to the same double-blind and placebo standards as his’ – also showed favorable results for the drug.
Ivermectin is incredibly cheap due to its widespread use across the world to treat malaria, scabies, lice and other parasitic infections. In Bangladesh, the cost of ivermectin is around $0.60 to $1.80 for a five-day course, according to the report. In Israel, it costs up to $10 per day.
While Schwartz’s study showed efficacy among those who had already tested positive, it didn’t determine whether ivermectin is an effective prophylactic which could prevent one from contracting Covid-19, nor does it show whether it reduces chances of hospitalization – however Schwartz noted that other studies have shown such evidence.
For example, the study published earlier this year in the American Journal of Therapeutics highlighted that “a review by the Front Line COVID-19 Critical Care Alliance summarized findings from 27 studies on the effects of ivermectin for the prevention and treatment of COVID-19 infection, concluding that ivermectin ‘demonstrates a strong signal of therapeutic efficacy’ against COVID-19.”
“Another recent review found that ivermectin reduced deaths by 75%,” the report said. –Jerusalem Post
As the Post notes, Ivermectin has been actively opposed as a Covid treatment by the World Health Organization, the FDA, and pharmaceutical companies.
The “FDA has not approved ivermectin for use in treating or preventing COVID-19 in humans,” it said.
“Ivermectin tablets are approved at very specific doses for some parasitic worms, and there are topical (on the skin) formulations for head lice and skin conditions like rosacea. Ivermectin is not an antiviral (a drug for treating viruses). Taking large doses of this drug is dangerous and can cause serious harm.”
Meanwhile, Merck Co. – which manufactured the drug in the 1980s, has come out big against the use of ivermectin to treat Covid-19. In February, the company’s website read: “Company scientists continue to carefully examine the findings of all available and emerging studies of Ivermectin for the treatment of COVID-19 for evidence of efficacy and safety. It is important to note that, to date, our analysis has identified no scientific basis for a potential therapeutic effect against COVID-19 from pre-clinical studies; no meaningful evidence for clinical activity or clinical efficacy in patients with COVID-19 disease, and a concerning lack of safety data in the majority of studies.”
As the Post points out – Merck has not launched a single study of its own on ivermectin.
“You would think Merck would be happy to hear that ivermectin might be helpful to corona patients and try to study it, but they are most loudly declaring the drug should not be used,” said Schwartz.
“A billion people took it. They gave it to them. It’s a real shame.”
In closing, the research team writes that “Developing new medications can take years; therefore, identifying existing drugs that can be re-purposed against COVID-19 [and] that already have an established safety profile through decades of use could play a critical role in suppressing or even ending the SARS-CoV-2 pandemic.”
“Using re-purposed medications may be especially important because it could take months, possibly years, for much of the world’s population to get vaccinated, particularly among low- to middle-income populations.”
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
I have been vilified for refusing to be jabbed with an experimental vaccine. I have been told that I am among the worst people on the face of the earth as that refusal is putting an inordinate number of people at risk of near-certain death. That it is my civic duty and obligation to be swept up in the hysteria and march meekly in lockstep with whatever the omniscient government bureaucrats tell us to do. That I must sacrifice personal choices and freedom for the benefit of the collective. That, in fact, the choice to get a vaccine and to wear a mask is an expression of one’s freedom to be a moral citizen and to protect family, community, and country.
Joe Biden has told me that I am unpatriotic, and a very stupid person for not being vaccinated and robotically believing his claim: “You’re not going to get Covid if you have these vaccines.” (That is an out-and-out lie.)
I am in my later 70’s; over my lifetime I have lived among and have been exposed to people in refugee camps suffering from tuberculosis, cholera, hepatitis B, and diphtheria and, after arriving in the United States, polio. I managed to get through the Asian Flu pandemic in 1957-58, the Hong Kong Flu pandemic of 1968-69, the HIV/Aids pandemic in the 1980s, and the Swine Flu pandemic in 2009-10.
Thus, I am well aware of medical risks and realities, particularly when it comes to my health. I have been vaccinated for everything from tuberculosis to diphtheria to smallpox to polio to the annual flu. I have been reliably informed that I have a very robust immune system and, thankfully, I have never been seriously ill with any viral or bacterial infections.
I researched, from credible non-government sources, the evolution and development of the mRNA (Pfizer and Moderna) vaccines, their possible side effects, and the approval process. After considering the short and long-term unknowns of a new type of vaccine that contains attenuated virus based on the Covid-19 genetic code provided by China combined with the realities of Covid infections, I concluded that I was unwilling to run the risk of compromising an immune system that had maintained my good health for nearly eight decades.
My medical history and attendant health decisions are unique to me. Every person in the United States has their own distinctive medical history and, depending on circumstances, heredity and previous access to medication, and an immune system able or unable to fend off a variety of diseases.
A one-size-fits-all vaccine, particularly one that was approved on an emergency basis with unknown short and long-term side effects, requires allowing the citizenry to evaluate the risk for themselves. Instead, those that choose not to vaccinate are being called vile names and being threatened, intimidated, and coerced by politicians and government bureaucrats. Additionally, vaccines are being mandated as a condition of employment by many private businesses and in the federal government at the direction of the Biden Administration.
There are those who are attempting to compare the Supreme Court’s approval of individual states mandating the smallpox vaccination in response to a virulent outbreak around the turn of the 20th Century as a legal justification for the de facto mandating of Covid vaccines.
But the differences could not be starker. Nearly 30,000 out of 100,000 of those that contracted smallpox died of smallpox. Less than 110 out of 100,000 of those who contracted Covid-19 died of Covid-19. Further, the smallpox vaccine had been developed over a hundred years before 1900 and its benefits and side effects were well known.
As further validation that the Covid vaccines were approved with little or no assessment of short- or long-term effects, this past May, Professor Luc Montagnier, a French virologist and Nobel Prize winner, predicted a potential outcome of mass vaccinations. He said:
Mass vaccinations are a scientific error as well as a medical error. It is an unacceptable mistake. The history books will show that because it is the vaccination that is creating the variants.
…there are antibodies created by the vaccine forcing the virus to find another solution or die. [This how the variants such as the Delta variant are created] These variants are a production and result of the vaccination.
Every country that has pushed mass vaccination has experienced tremendous growth in Covid cases as well as increased hospitalizations and death rates among both vaccinated and unvaccinated people brought about by these variants. Fortunately, the variants to date, while highly contagious, do not appear to cause the same hospitalization and mortality rate as the first or alpha variant.
But that does not stop the Marxist-inspired Democrats and the Biden Administration from using the growth in cases to again threaten mandatory vaccinations, mask mandates and potential lockdowns in furtherance of the strategy put in place at the beginning of the pandemic to strip Americans of their rights and transform the populace into one that will meekly acquiesce to any specious government edicts.
It became clear to me in March of 2020 that the Chinese Coronavirus would be politically weaponized to defeat President Trump in the 2020 election and to launch the creation of a hybrid American version of a police state. And that all edicts and mandates from elected politicians were politically motivated. Further, drug approvals or disapprovals, as in the case of Ivermectin and Hydroxychloroquine, emanating from the Democrat party-dominated federal medical bureaucracy had to also be viewed through the lens of political and/or financial motivation.
Individual freedom is an increasingly rare commodity in the world today. As it is under siege virtually everywhere and now in the one country that once epitomized liberty. Making an informed decision whether to be vaccinated or not is part and parcel of the most fundamental of all freedoms.
The American Marxists currently in control of the Democrat party and myriad institutions believe that not only public health programs but all public policy should be based on force and coercion. By forcing the American citizenry to compromise their rights through overt prevarications and enforcing ill-advised mandates, the entire structure of individual freedom is eroded and trust in government permanently compromised.
These collectivists fail to understand that protecting constitutional rights encourages societal solidarity. People are more likely to trust officials who protect their personal liberty. Without trust, public officials will not be able to persuade the public to take the most reasonable precautions during future emergencies which will make a bad situation even worse. 21st Century public health depends on good science, good communication, and trust in public officials to tell the truth.
By refusing to succumb to the pressure to get the Covid vaccination, these Americans are telling those in government that preserving the public’s health in the 21st Century requires preserving respect for personal liberty.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
While the public continues to debate COVID-19 Vaccination “Passports” or IDs in order to participate in society, many businesses have recently announced that they are planning to mandate the shots as a condition for employment.
It is a growing list, and currently includes companies such as:
Google
Facebook
Twitter
Microsoft
Walmart
Saks Fifth Avenue
Walt Disney Co.
Netflix
BlackRock
Vanguard
Morgan Stanley
Goldman Sachs
Uber
Lyft
DoorDash
Ford
Tyson Foods
United Airlines
The New York Times
The Washington Post
and scores of others, including many restaurants and gyms, and most of the medical industry.
This begs the question: Are these companies committing financial suicide by further restricting the labor force that is already seeing massive shortages since last year?
I think the answer is most definitely, YES.
One industry that has obviously seen explosive growth since the Plandemic started is the pharmaceutical industry which has received TRILLIONS of dollars to develop COVID-19 “vaccines.”
But according to a report today published in FiercePharma, the marketing trade publication for the industry, what is holding back future growth in the industry are staffing shortages.
Raw materials and limits on high-tech equipment often take center stage when it comes to discussions around manufacturing bottlenecks. But the COVID-19 pandemic has exposed another weak link in the pharmaceutical supply chain: people.
As COVID-19 vaccine production moves full-tilt, mRNA players Pfizer and Moderna are having trouble recruiting talent in Massachusetts, The Boston Globe first reported, citing comments by company execs at a hearing of the Massachusetts Legislative Manufacturing Caucus last week.
Hiring challenges, which have been exacerbated by the pandemic, aren’t unique to COVID-19 vaccine makers. They’re not confined to the Bay State either, biopharma executives have warned.
The problem has surfaced in other industry hot spots like Bothell, Washington, and it’s emerged as a pain point in the fast-growing cell and gene therapy field, for example.
Meanwhile, 68% of organizations surveyed during the pandemic flagged finding and attracting quality workers as their biggest recruitment challenge, workforce resources company AMS said earlier this year.
Moderna earlier this year blamed vaccine delays in countries like the U.K. and Canada on “limited human and material resources” in its European supply chain. At a summit on COVID-19 vaccine scale-up the next week, the biotech’s CEO Stéphane Bancel put it more bluntly when he said, “the bottleneck right now is people.”
Much of Moderna’s production work is concentrated in the U.S., but the company’s European supply chain depends on Swiss CDMO Lonza, which had struggled to fill out its roster for the pandemic undertaking, the CEO said at the time.
While COVID-19 production timelines have put many companies through the wringer, vaccine players aren’t the only ones struggling to staff up in the pandemic’s second year.
“We’re definitely seeing a slowdown in responses to roles that we’re posting, roles that in previous years you would have had a real big pile of resumes,” Cory Siddons, senior director of manufacturing at Alnylam, said at last week’s hearing. The problem isn’t unique to manufacturing technician jobs, Siddons added.
Part of the problem stems from the fact that each new employee needs to be trained on specific manufacturing practices and standards for their role, which can take months at minimum, Andrea Wagner, Ph.D., chief technical officer at Berkshire Sterile Manufacturing, added.
Those technical qualifications become even trickier when applied to fields like cell and gene therapy. The next-gen meds are growing in popularity as hundreds of biopharma companies look to advance their own personalized prospects.
There simply “aren’t enough humans” in the highly specialized field, Fabian Gerlinghaus, co-founder and CEO of Cellares, said in a recent interview. (Full article.)
While most of the Health Impact News readers will probably not cry over staffing shortages in Big Pharma for vaccine production, this is an issue facing ALL American businesses right now, and getting worse.
The common blame used to explain these labor shortages is the “COVID-19 virus.”
But as we have documented here at Health Impact News, publishing dozens and dozens of cases of people who died in the prime of their life after receiving a COVID-19 shot, we know that all of these deaths and injuries following the COVID-19 shots are always blamed on COVID-19, and not the shots.
And since the CDC has proven to be a disinformation propaganda agency that regularly lies to protect Big Pharma, we actually have no idea what the true number of deaths and injuries are that have followed the COVID-19 injections. They currently admit that about 12,000 people have died after getting the shots in the last 8 months, double the amount of deaths recorded following ALL vaccines for the past 30 years. (Source.)
Add to that the fact that there is a very sizable portion of the population that will simply refuse to get a shot, even if it means being fired from their job, then I think we can answer the question posed in the headline of this article with a definite “YES.”
Mandating employees to receive a COVID-19 shot as a condition of employment is financial suicide, and a terrible business decision.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Greg Piper writers for the news site Just The News and recently decided to share a story from The College Fix, where he was previously an editor. The story included the line “Vaccines are not safe for everyone.” That line appears to have prompted Twitter to suspend his account despite the fact that some people have medical exemptions from the vaccine due to the high risk posed by preexisting medical conditions. Indeed, the Center for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) states that some people cannot take the vaccine for medical reasons. The latest censorship controversy is reminiscent of the suspension of writer Alex Berenson after he posted the public results of a Pfizer vaccine trial.
The CDC repeatedly has stressed that “All states provide medical exemptions.” CDC website also states that “all states and the District of Columbia allow a medical exemption. A medical exemption is allowed when a child has a medical condition that prevents them from receiving a vaccine.”
This is a standard question for all vaccines. The CDC has a site titled “Who Should Not Get Vaccinated with these Vaccines” that stresses “because of age, health conditions, or other factors, some people should not get certain vaccines or should wait before getting them.”
Specifically on Covid-19, the CDC warns “adults of any age with certain underlying medical conditions are at increased risk for severe illness from the virus that causes COVID-19.” The CDC offers a list of people who have a high risk of severe illness from the vaccine.
However, when Piper noted that “vaccines are not safe for everyone,” he was hit with a suspension for spreading misinformation by Twitter:
Even if Piper’s posting is controversial, the suspension is another example of Twitter enforcing its own corporate view of “the truth.” It will not allow anyone to debate or discuss opposing views on such subjects. If Piper’s positing is misleading, then allow others to rebut or refute the posting. Instead, Twitter is enforcing one of the largest censorship programs in history.
It is the license of the censor. Twitter is unwilling to let people read or discuss viewpoints that it disagrees with as a corporation. Many on the left, however, have embraced the concept of corporate speech and censorship. It turns out that the problem with censorship for many was the failure to censor views that they opposed. With the “right” censors at work, the free speech concerns have been set aside.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Rather than admit defeat in the face of vaccine failure or vaccine refusal, media and government officials are now openly stoking the fires of hostility toward the unvaccinated.
In the global war on national and individual sovereignty — for which COVID-19 has been serving as the unlawful casus belli — two tactics long favored by tyrants have been deployed by government officials and mainstream media to utmost effect, successfully distracting many citizens from the increasingly aggressive attacks on their civil and human rights and livelihoods.
The first tactic — the sophisticated mobilization of appeals to fear — has steered many individuals into unquestioning compliance with harsh public health authoritarianism. The second — the promotion of divide-and-conquer theatrics — has been instrumental in helping build public support for coercion, including vaccine mandates.
After a brief summer respite, fear-mongering is once again in full swing, with headlines screaming about a “highly contagious mutant version of the coronavirus” (dubbed the “delta variant”) and yet another seeming rise in “cases.”
What is the most obvious reason for the renewed media hysteria? Demand for COVID vaccines has stagnated.
Familiar with the propagandist’s tendency to inflate key numbers, investigative journalist Jon Rappoport suggests the proportion of the population refusing the injections is likely much largerthan officials are reporting — and that does not “sit well with the vaccinators-in-charge.”
Moreover, those declining the experimental shots continue to indicate they will not change their mind.
On July 30, the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention’s (CDC) director, Dr. Rochelle Walensky, signaled “the war has changed” after warning “vaccinated people infected with Delta can transmit the virus.”
Two weeks earlier, however, Walensky had a different population in her sights, describing COVID-19 as a “pandemic of the unvaccinated.”
That comment — and recent remarks by other highly placed figures such as Alabama Gov. Kay Ivey — indicate that rather than admit defeat in the face of vaccine failure or vaccine refusal, officials intend to ratchet up their dangerous divide-and-conquer rhetoric. Taking off the gloves, they are now openly stoking the fires of hostility toward the unvaccinated.
As COVID—especially Delta variant—surges among fully vaccinated, Brian Hooker, Ph.D., said the more variant deviates from original sequence used for vaccine, the less effective vaccine will be on variant.
— Robert F. Kennedy Jr (@RobertKennedyJr) August 4, 2021
At the same time, the media began amping up reports blaming the unvaccinated for the so-called “Delta variant,” furnishing a pretext for public health officials to not only renew their calls for “widespread vaccination and rigid adherence to public health measures” but also to “move the goal posts for target vaccination rates.”
Health providers on the front lines have shared anecdotal evidence with Children’s Health Defense confirming that officialdom is interested only in new COVID “cases” to the extent that such cases crop up in the unvaccinated.
However, the blame-the-unvaccinated narrative is contradicted by the many “Delta variant” storiesnow emerging from numerous locations around the world showing that the fully vaccinated constitute the majority of delta “cases.”
Estimates range from 75% of new “cases” in Cape Cod and highly vaccinated Singapore, to anywhere from 50% to 90% in Israel. In Iceland, described by journalist Alex Berensen as a “vaccinators’ paradise,” the nation is reportedly “setting daily records for new infections, mostly among the vaccinated.”
Although this may be the case, it is important to keep in mind that the highly coordinated mainstream media rarely trumpet a story unless it serves a propaganda purpose, and never more so than in the age of COVID.
Recall, too, that “cases” are determined by Emergency-Use-AuthorizedRT-PCR tests that were never intended for diagnostic purposes. As critics have stated for months, PCR’s Nobel-Prize-winning inventor, Kary Mullis, repeatedly made the point that “PCR is just a process that allows you to make a whole lot of something out of something.”
The results, said Mullis, make it possible to “find almost anything in anybody” but do not “tell you that you are sick.”
Although it is unclear why they would change their tune, both the World Health Organization and, just recently, CDC have admitted that RT-PCR is not reliable for diagnosing SARS-CoV-2.
In addition to offering a rationale for inflaming hostility against the unvaccinated, could the “delta variant” cover story be serving other purposes?
For example, rather than question the dud vaccines, researchers are suddenly publishing analyses of waning immunity and vaccine failure — in prestigious journals like The Lancet — that all too predictably prescribe booster shots and new-and-improved vaccines as solutions.
Recognizing the vaccines were never even necessary to begin with inevitably raises questions about why governments around the world are so eager to install these regular operating system updates in their populations.
Dr. Anthony Fauci has already started incrementally laying the groundwork in the U.S., asserting the likelihood that “at some time, we may need a booster,” while Israel has begun administering boosters to the age group that historically has the poorest response to vaccination — those over 60.
A 65-year-old actor who received two doses of the experimental Sinovac vaccine in February and March and a dose of the Pfizer jab in July died six days after receiving the third injection.
The media’s alarmism about the delta variant has also served to white out and perhaps disguise the steady rise in serious COVID vaccine injuries and deaths. In mid-July, Israeli internist Rafael Zioni tweeted out dramatic Ministry of Health data showing that fully vaccinated individuals constituted a majority of COVID hospitalizations and serious illnesses.
This is the Israeli data for infection breakthrough among vaccinated with 2 shots of Pfizer. Seems that efficacy is close to zero.. pic.twitter.com/F7nkrNVdp0
In Sydney, Australia, a post on Rumble noted 140 of 141 people hospitalized with COVID were fully vaccinated, while the one remaining individual had received one dose. Of those hospitalized, 43 were in intensive care, including eight youth under the age of 30.
Although doctors blame these incidents on COVID infection, these health setbacks could just as well be vaccine adverse events either not recognized or not called out as such.
COVID deaths and vaccine deaths
As The Defender reported in late July, the CDC-imposed guidelines for reporting COVID deaths represent an ethically questionable departure from the industry standard previously in place, with medical examiners and others suspiciously instructed to define “deaths involving COVID-19” as “deaths with confirmed or presumed COVID-19.”
Without these skewed reporting rules, an estimated 90.2% fewer fatalities would have been attributed to COVID. Exaggerating the death toll is a tried-and-true maneuver to hawk more vaccines — in the past, CDC insiders have advised framing a given influenza season as more “deadly” to generate demand for flu shots.
Even so, the numbers the CDC reported for July — several thousand deaths “involving” COVID-19 for that month — should have been good news, representing the lowest number of monthly deaths at any point since February 2020.
The July figure was also 31 times lower than the peak of more than 100,000 “confirmed or presumed” deaths reported in January 2021.
CDC admits that among the cumulative fatalities “involving” COVID since 2020 (through July 25, 2021), COVID-19 was the sole cause of death for only 5%. For all other deaths “involving” COVID, death certificates cite an average of four additional contributing conditions or causes.
In contrast, the safety of COVID injections has been dubious from the start. Eight months in, the OpenVAERS Project (an independent group that provides easy access to vaccine injury data from the U.S. Vaccine Adverse Event Reporting System) reminds us the experimental jabs have produced at least “four times more fatalities than the terrorist attacks on 9/11” — or 15 times more, if whistleblower estimates of vast undercounting of COVID vaccine-related deaths prove accurate.
Outrageously, the U.S. government has just purchased an additional 200 million doses of the Pfizer/BioNTech vaccine, expecting taxpayers to continue financing their own destruction.
Rather than change course or cop to the accumulating evidence of widespread harm, officials find it far more politically expedient to stir up animosity against the army of people — the unvaccinated — asking the right questions.
However, as Jon Rappoport reminds us, this is no time to surrender: “If enough people say NO to the shot, it’s over.”
Postscript: In the midst of increasing propaganda designed to instill fear and panic while falsely elevating the safety profiles of COVID vaccines, the push for vaccine mandates is at an all-time high. Children’s Health Defense has launched a letter-writing campaign directed to local, state and federal officials spelling out why mandates are wrong for people and wrong for America. Our advocacy portal makes it easy for citizens to contact elected officials at every level of government. Send a letter to all of your elected officials with just one click.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Will US occupation troops really leave Iraq? That’s the question that Washington is so far unable to answer. The White House says the official date of the long goodbye is this month, August 2021.
Donald Trump announced a pullout of US troops while still in office but his deadline was simply ignored by the new Biden administration which has also been under mounting pressure to end the two-decade US occupation of Mesopotamia. Left wing Democrats wanted a full end to the war the US has waged since 2003. Right-wing Republicans, blissfully unaware of Mideast realities, urged more troops be sent to Iraq.
After losing some 4,431 troops and 8,000 mercenaries (aka ‘contractors’) and 1,145 troops from allied nations dragooned into the Iraq conflict, and 31,994 wounded – many with serious head wounds from roadside bombs – Washington switched gears in Iraq and adopted the old British Imperial system of colonial rule.
The Britain Empire created Iraq in the 1920’s from the wreckage of the dying Ottoman Empire to secure possession of Mesopotamia’s abundant oil. At the time, the mighty Royal Navy was converting from coal to oil. Iraq became Britain’s vast fuel depot.
A new figurehead king from the Hashemite tribes was put into power by London, backed by a local constabulary, British garrison troops and, most effectively, the Royal Air Force.
In the 1920’s, Winston Churchill approved RAF fighters to bomb restive Arab and Kurdish tribes with mustard gas and poisonous Yperite. The British eventually crushed domestic resistance in Iraq while shamelessly denouncing fascist Italy for also using poison gas against Libyan nationalist rebels.
The RAF bombed and staffed rebellious Iraqis right up to the late 1940’s. British air power played a key role in crushing the nationalist uprising in Iraq by Rashid Ali, who was smeared a pro-fascist by Britain’s imperial press.
The US eventually adopted the low-cost British colonial system for ruling Iraq. US warplanes were stationed at up to six former Iraqi airbases, becoming the principal enforcer of the occupation. US troops were thinned out. By 2020, this job was done so skillfully that the US presence in Iraq became almost invisible.
Iraq was occupied by western forces but it looked like an independent nation with a US-installed president and executive branch. Kurdish areas in the north became virtual US-run mini-states. The demented ISIS movement was totally stamped out by US airpower and Iranian militias. As a thank you, the Iranian military supremo in Iraq, Gen. Qasem Soleimani, was ordered murdered by President Trump after being lured to Iraq for supposed peace talks.
Iraq was one of the most advanced states in the Arab world and a US ally – before 1991. Today, it lies in ruins, smashed to pieces by US airpower, civil wars, and sectarian conflict.
President George W. Bush was convinced by militarists, notably Dick Cheney and Donald Rumsfeld, after intense pressure from pro-Israel groups in the US and their media accomplices, to invade Iraq. The Washington hawks planned to use US-occupied Iraq as a central base for dominating the entire Mideast and grabbing its oil.
The golden victory in Iraq promised by the neocons turned to ashes, leaving Washington stuck deep in an ungovernable ruined nation that had even to import oil. At one point, the off-the-rails neocons in Washington even claimed Iraq had a fleet of ships in the Atlantic Ocean carrying ‘killer’ drones that were about to attack sleeping America.
Iraq was so battered and demolished after three decades of bombing and wars that it was worth almost nothing. Faced by the threat of more guerilla warfare, the new older, wiser US administration of Joe Biden announced it would pull all remaining US combat troops from Iraq, but leaving 2,500 behind for ‘training’ and embassy security (the heavily fortified US Baghdad Embassy is one of the biggest in the world). Osama bin Laden called the US embassies in Baghdad and Kabul, ‘modern crusader castles.’
‘Training’ is a bad joke. Iraq has been at almost constant war since 1980. Iraqis need loyalty, pride and patriotism to be effective fighters. Who needs training from the armed forces that got whipped in Vietnam and now Afghanistan? Iraq needs a real national government rather than a bunch of corrupt stooges and foreign agents in Baghdad. President Saddam Hussein predicted that the US would face the ‘mother of all battles’ in Iraq. He was right.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Featured image: U.S. transfers an airfield to Iraqi government forces in 2020. Credit: Public Domain
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Without acknowledgement of Brazil’s government for what it is – effectively a US-backed military regime – no sense can be made of its recent past nor useful analysis of its coming elections. With attempts to force changes to the voting system, backed by threats that the 2022 elections will not take place at all, Brazil is entering phase three of its slow coup, and the consolidation of the military in power.
18.6% of 14,600 Brazilian government positions appointed under President Bolsonaro have been occupied by military personnel.
This figure is higher than the 1964-85 dictatorship-era peak.
There is needless semantic fog obscuring what Brazil’s government now is. Whilst the word “regime” is usually reserved in the anglosphere for officially enemies of the US and allies, Brazil surely fits within objective definition; a military dominated, far-right authoritarian administration, which came to power by anti-democratic means – with coercion, threats, propaganda and abuse of the judicial system – which favours the interests of foreign capital, and which maintains itself through corruption, institutional confrontation, and violence.
Bolsonaro’s candidacy was democratic packaging for the long game of the military’s return to government. As they look to defend their position a year out from elections, the situation has escalated.
Bolsonaro’s former chief of staff and now defence minister, General Braga Netto is being called before the Supreme Court for his reported threat to head of Congress Artur Lira that if their desired change to the voting system – the introduction of a printed vote – was not implemented, that the 2022 elections would not go ahead.
Weeks prior, Braga Netto and other key Generals signed off on a letter threatening the Brazilian Senate over its investigation of former health minister, General Pazuello.
In a live broadcast on social media, which was reportedly the idea of Government Secretary General Luiz Eduardo Ramos, Bolsonaro made baseless claims of fraud at the 2014 election, blaming the voting machines, and calling supporters to the streets.
Using psychological operations techniques learned from WHINSEC, which have underpinned every stage of the long coup, the military’s ‘green and yellow nationalist’ supporters were again mobilised in support of this objective, which they depict as making voting “auditable” and “transparent”, under the false pretext that the current system is not.
Electoral Court President Barroso has warned that these changes would simply open the door to old school election fraud.
Bolsonaro looks like he will certainly need a means to contest the 2022 result; as things stand he is on course to lose heavily to Lula da Silva. The two would have faced eachother in 2018, had the former president not been jailed on since annulled charges to keep him out of the race, which happened with the judiciary acting under a succession of threats from the Armed Forces. Bolsonaro-allied, FBI-tutored prosecutors called Lula’s imprisonment “a gift from the CIA”.
It is extremely naive to expect the military to peacefully relinquish power after the decades it took to get back in government. Wishful thinking that Braga Netto and the other senior generals were adults in the room, a moderating force on Bolsonaro, or even that they would remove him, should have evaporated completely with admissions from General Villas Boas and Michel Temer about the military’s guiding hand throughout the 2013-16 coup and its second phase, the 2018 election campaign.
Bolsonaro was not a political accident that they reluctantly got behind, as some depicted. On the contrary, he was their candidate all along.
Now we are entering a third phase of Brazil’s long coup; a battle for the post 2022 scenario, with an effort to maintain the economic and foreign policy status quo under a more respectable face, meeting parallel neofascist attempts to consolidate power by any means.
Failure of any “third way” candidate to emerge that is capable of even competing with Lula at the polls may well have convinced both the military and the US to stick with the name recognition they have, as Bolsonaro considers hikes to social security payments in election year to boost his trailing numbers.
Meanwhile US-trained, military-decorated Lava Jato judge, Sergio Moro, who helped put Bolsonaro in power by jailing Lula in 2018, is maintained as plan B or his potential successor. Moro recently returned from his new home in the United States to discuss his candidacy with the centre-right, Bolsonaro-allied Podemos party, and as was reported, even talk of a presidential ticket with current vice, General Mourão.
All of this is happening with the apparent blessing of the US government. Visits in quick succession by both CIA director and National Security Advisor are tacit displays of support, expose the limits of environmental rhetoric over the Amazon, and pierce any remaining wishful thinking that Biden would be automatically opposed to Bolsonaro ideologically.
Brazilian governance in its current militarised state is far too useful to the US strategically, and too good for business, to let go. After helping orchestrate much of the process that reduced Brazil to its desperate state, across Republican and Democrat administrations alike, it is extremely naive to expect the US to change anything other than the superficial presentation of its Brazil relations.
CIA think tank CSIS is now promoting even closer ties, and the establishment of a “binational institution” to formalise the relationship between far-right, military-governed Brazil, and the United States.
Time is long overdue to drop any pretence about what Brazil faces. Depiction of Bolsonaro as the cartoon villain; a sole representative of what is actually a US-aligned, long term military power project, is disingenuous. Anglophone media has for the most part adhered to the military and US government’s coup-friendly master narratives throughout the process, and they continue to in this manner.
Similar refusal to acknowledge the gravity of what Brazil faces is how the 2016 coup against Dilma Rousseff’s government was placed in inverted commas and reduced to a matter of opinion, how Lula’s political persecution was depicted as legitimate, and how a neofascist military backed candidate was reduced to simply a “conservative”, whom moderate voters and foreign investors alike could be comfortable with.
Without recognition of Brazil’s government for what it is – yes, a US-backed military regime – no sense can be made of its recent past, nor its troubling near future.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.
***
The U.S. “has nuclear weapons on hair-trigger alert, ready to strike first and begin a nuclear war that could result in the deaths of billions of people around the globe,” warned one coalition member.
The 76th anniversary of the U.S. military’s atomic bombing of Hiroshima and Nagasaki is coming up, and in an effort to prevent such mass murder from reoccurring, a broad coalition of peace, religious, and community groups launched a national campaign on Wednesday to urge President Joe Biden and Congress to adopt a policy of “No First Use of Nuclear Weapons.”
With towns throughout the U.S. planning to hold commemorative events from August 6 through August 9 to mourn the tens of thousands of people who died or suffered in Japan as a result of the atomic bombs the U.S. military dropped on two densely built-up cities with large civilian populations in 1945, campaign organizers—who consider the no-first-use policy a “step on the road to the eventual abolition of all nuclear weapons by all nations”—are working to ensure that “such a holocaust never be allowed to happen again.”
The “No First Use: Decrease the Danger of Nuclear War” coalition defined a first-use nuclear strike as “an attack using nuclear weapons against an enemy that did not first launch a nuclear strike against the United States, its territories, or its allies.” The coalition is pressuring Biden to declare—and Congress to legislate—that the U.S. “will neither initiate nor threaten to initiate the first use of nuclear weapons.”
According to the coalition, the risk of nuclear war, which Daniel Ellsberg and others have warned would “kill billions of people and end civilization as we know it,” is increasing because the Trump and Biden administrations decided to withdraw from arms control treaties and pursue a new Cold War with Russia and China.
By holding online and in-person educational events on campuses and public venues nationwide, and by helping citizens and civic groups engage with lawmakers, the coalition seeks to achieve “a no-first-use policy for our common survival.” Such a policy, the coalition argued, would make everyone safer by reducing the likelihood of nuclear threats, false alarms, or cyberterrorist attacks escalating into full-blown missile exchanges.
Along with preventing the use of nuclear weapons through the adoption of a no-first-use policy, the coalition aims to increase support for nuclear disarmament. The presence of nuclear arsenals, the coalition stressed, means that the danger of proliferation continues to exist.
Steve Gallant of Massachusetts Peace Action said Wednesday in a statement that “the United States has never agreed to a no-first-use policy and has nuclear weapons on hair-trigger alert, ready to strike first and begin a nuclear war that could result in the deaths of billions of people around the globe.”
In addition to lacking a no-first-use policy, the Pentagon’s 2018 Nuclear Posture Review “actually expand[ed] the range of significant non-nuclear strategic attacks—whether they be cyber, chemical, or biological warfare—to which the U.S. may respond with the use of nuclear weapons,” the coalition pointed out.
Last month, as the Biden administration began to draft its Nuclear Posture Review, a group of 21 Democratic lawmakers urged the president to reduce the nation’s nuclear stockpile and commit to a no-first-use policy.
In her book, Thermonuclear Monarchy: Choosing Between Democracy and Doom, Harvard University professor Elaine Scarry points out that “the president of the United States has the sole authority to order the launch of hundreds of nuclear warheads within minutes, without consultation or agreement from any other sector of U.S. government or society: not the Cabinet, nor the Congress, nor the Joint Chiefs of Staff, nor the Supreme Court.”
Zia Mian, co-director of Princeton University’s Program on Science and Global Security, emphasized Wednesday that the U.S. president holds this power despite the fact that “any threat or use of nuclear weapons in the present day constitutes a crime against humanity and a crime under international law.”
Democratic lawmakers in the House and Senate have introduced legislation to restrict first-use nuclear strikes and to slash spending on nuclear weapons.
Rep. Adam Smith (D-Wash.), chair of the House Armed Services Committee, and Sen. Elizabeth Warren (D-Mass.), a member of the Senate Armed Services Committee, in April reintroduced the No First Use Act.
And in February, Rep. Ted Lieu (D-Calif.) and Sen. Ed Markey (D-Mass.) introduced the Restricting First Use of Nuclear Weapons Act of 2021, which would “prohibit the use of federal funds to conduct a first-use nuclear strike unless Congress expressly authorizes such a strike pursuant to a declaration of war.”
Biden has said that he supports a no-first-use policy, and the coalition implored him to sign such legislation should it reach the Oval Office.
Pamela Richard of Peace Action of Wisconsin said Wednesday that “while we urge the passage of these bills as a first step, what is needed is the universal acceptance of the recent United Nations Treaty on the Prohibition of Nuclear Weapons, banning the development, testing, production, stockpiling, stationing, transfer, use, and threat of use of nuclear weapons.”
“Our long-term goal,” Richard added, “is total nuclear disarmament.”
Last October, the movement to abolish nuclear weapons celebrated when Honduras became the 50th country to ratify the U.N.’s nuclear ban, pushing the agreement over the threshold required to enter into force. Despite the fact that several nuclear powers, including the U.S., the only country to ever engage in nuclear warfare, refused to sign—with the Trump administration even urging other governments to ditch the pact—the international treaty went into effect on January 22.
Nonetheless, “Congress is funding an upgrade of our nuclear weapons triad,” Cole Harrison, executive director of Massachusetts Peace Action, notedWednesday.
A report by the Federation of American Scientists published in March foundthat the U.S. plans to spend up to $264 billion on the construction and maintenance of a new nuclear missile following intense lobbying efforts by the weapons industry.
During a recent peace conference, Markey told the audience that “the risk of inadvertent nuclear war has risen to a level that is simply unacceptable.”
Medea Benjamin, co-founder of anti-war group CodePink, said Wednesday that “as long as the nuclear-armed nations maintain thousands of nuclear weapons on hair-trigger alert, the danger that these weapons of mass destruction will be used continues to increase.”
From Common Dreams: Our work is licensed under Creative Commons (CC BY-NC-ND 3.0). Feel free to republish and share widely.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Featured image is from ICAN (International Campaign to Abolish Nuclear Weapons)
ISBN Number: 978-0-9737147-5-3
Year: 2012
Pages: 102 Print Edition: $10.25 (+ shipping and handling) PDF Edition: $6.50 (sent directly to your email account!)
Michel Chossudovsky is Professor of Economics at the University of Ottawa and Director of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG), which hosts the critically acclaimed website www.globalresearch.ca . He is a contributor to the Encyclopedia Britannica. His writings have been translated into more than 20 languages.
Reviews
“This book is a ‘must’ resource – a richly documented and systematic diagnosis of the supremely pathological geo-strategic planning of US wars since ‘9-11’ against non-nuclear countries to seize their oil fields and resources under cover of ‘freedom and democracy’.” –John McMurtry, Professor of Philosophy, Guelph University
“In a world where engineered, pre-emptive, or more fashionably “humanitarian” wars of aggression have become the norm, this challenging book may be our final wake-up call.” -Denis Halliday, Former Assistant Secretary General of the United Nations
Michel Chossudovsky exposes the insanity of our privatized war machine. Iran is being targeted with nuclear weapons as part of a war agenda built on distortions and lies for the purpose of private profit. The real aims are oil, financial hegemony and global control. The price could be nuclear holocaust. When weapons become the hottest export of the world’s only superpower, and diplomats work as salesmen for the defense industry, the whole world is recklessly endangered. If we must have a military, it belongs entirely in the public sector. No one should profit from mass death and destruction. –Ellen Brown, author of ‘Web of Debt’ and president of the Public Banking Institute
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
We are commemorating the 76th anniversary of the bombing of Hiroshima and Nagasaki. This article by Edward Curtin was first published by Global Research in 2018.
“Ahab is forever Ahab, man. This whole act’s immutably decreed. ‘Twas rehearsed by thee and me billion years before this ocean rolled. Fool! I am the Fates’ lieutenant; I act under orders.” – Herman Melville, Moby Dick
“The greatest evil is not now done in those sordid ‘dens of crime’ that Dickens loved to paint…But it is conceived and ordered (moved, seconded, carried, and minuted) in clean, carpeted, warmed, and well-lighted offices, by quiet men with white collars and cut fingernails and smooth-shaven cheeks who do not need to raise their voice.” – C. S. Lewis, author’s preface, 1962, The Screwtape Letters
American history can only accurately be described as the story of demonic possession, however you choose to understand that phrase.Maybe radical “evil” will suffice.But right from the start the American colonizers were involved in massive killing because they considered themselves divinely blessed and guided, a chosen people whose mission would come to be called “manifest destiny.”Nothing stood in the way of this divine calling, which involved the need to enslave and kill millions and millions of innocent people that continues down to today.“Others” have always been expendable since they have stood in the way of the imperial march ordained by the American god. This includes all the wars waged based on lies and false flag operations. It is not a secret, although most Americans, if they are aware of it, prefer to see it as a series of aberrations carried out by “bad apples.”Or something from the past.
Our best writers and prophets have told us the truth: Thoreau, Twain, William James, MLK, Fr. Daniel Berrigan, et al.: we are a nation of killers of the innocent.We are conscienceless.We are brutal.We are in the grip of evil forces.
The English writer D. H. Lawrence said it perfectly in 1923,
“The American soul is hard, isolate, stoic and a killer.It has never yet melted.”
It still hasn’t.
When on August 6 and 9, 1945 the United States killed 200-300 thousand innocent Japanese civilians with atomic bombs in Hiroshima and Nagasaki, they did so intentionally.It was an act of sinister state terrorism, unprecedented by the nature of the weapons but not by the slaughter. The American terror bombings of Japanese cities that preceded the atomic bombings of Hiroshima and Nagasaki – led by the infamous Major General Curtis LeMay (image on the right)– were also intentionally aimed at Japanese civilians and killed hundreds of thousands of them.
Is there an American artist’s painting of Tokyo destroyed by the firebombing to go next to Picasso’s Guernica, where estimates of the dead range between 800 and 1,600?In Tokyo alone more than 100, 000 Japanese civilians were burnt to death by cluster bombs of napalm.All this killing was intentional. I repeat: Intentional.Is that not radical evil?Demonic?Only five Japanese cities were spared such bombing.
The atomic bombings were an intentional holocaust, not to end the war, as the historical record amply demonstrates, but to send a message to the Soviet Union that we could do to them what we did to the residents of Japan.President Truman made certain that the Japanese willingness to surrender in May 1945 was made unacceptable because he and his Secretary-of-State James Byrneswanted to use the atomic bombs – “as quickly as possible to ‘show results’” in Byrnes’ words – to send a message to the Soviet Union.So “the Good War” was ended in the Pacific with the “good guys” killing hundreds of thousand Japanese civilians to make a point to the “bad guys,” who have been demonized ever since. Russia phobia is nothing new.
Satan always wears the other’s face.
Many Baby Boomers like to say they grew up with the bomb.They are lucky. They grew up.They got be scared.They got to hide under their desks and wax nostalgic about it.Do you remember dog tags?Those 1950s and 1960s?The scary movies?
Street scene in Mitsubishi Steel Works plant (approximately 1.1 km from ground zero) after the dropping of the atomic bomb in Hiroshima, showing injured Civilian casualties on the footpath awaiting medical treatment. (Source: Public Domain)
The children of Hiroshima and Nagasaki who died under our bombs on August 6 and 9, 1945 didn’t get to grow up.They couldn’t hide.They just went under. To be accurate: we put them under. Or they were left to smolder for decades in pain and then die.But that it was necessary to save American lives is the lie. It’s always about American lives, as if the owners of the country actually cared about them.But to tender hearts and innocent minds, it’s a magic incantation.Poor us!
Fat Man, Little Boy – how the words echo down the years to the now fat Americans who grew up in the 1950s and who think like little boys and girls about their country’s demonic nature.Innocence – it is wonderful!We are different now.
“We are great because we are good,” that’s what Hillary Clinton told us.
The Libyans can attest to that.We are exceptional, special.The next election will prove we can defeat Mr. Pumpkin Head and restore America to its “core values.”
Perhaps you think I am cynical.But understanding true evil is not child’s play.It seems beyond the grasp of most Americans who need their illusions.Evil is real.There is simply no way to understand the savage nature of American history without seeing its demonic nature.How else can we redeem ourselves at this late date, possessed as we are by delusions of our own God-blessed goodness?
But average Americans play at innocence.They excite themselves at the thought that with the next election the nation will be “restored” to the right course.Of course there never was a right course, unless might makes right, which has always been the way of America’s rulers.Today Trump is viewed by so many as an aberration.He is far from it.He’s straight out of a Twain short story.He’s Vaudeville. He’s Melville’s confidence man.He’s us. Did it ever occur to those who are fixated on him that if those who own and run the country wanted him gone, he’d be gone in an instant?He can tweet and tweet idiotically, endlessly send out messages that he will contradict the next day, but as long as he protects the super-rich, accepts Israel’s control of him, and allows the CIA-military-industrial complex to do its world-wide killing and looting of the treasury, he will be allowed to entertain and excite the public – to get them worked up in a lather in pseudo-debates.And to make this more entertaining, he will be opposed by the “sane” Democratic opposition, whose intentions are as benign as an assassin’s smile.
Look back as far as you can to past U.S. presidents, the figureheads who “act under orders” (whose orders?), as did Ahab in his lust to kill the “evil” great white whale, and what do you see?You see servile killers in the grip of a sinister power.You see hyenas with polished faces. You see pasteboard masks.On the one occasion when one of these presidents dared to follow his conscience and rejected the devil’s pact that is the presidency’s killer-in-chief role, he – JFK – had his brains blown out in public view.An evil empire thrives on shedding blood, and it enforces its will through demonic messages.Resist and there will be blood on the streets, blood on the tracks, blood in your face.
Despite this, President Kennedy’s witness, his turn from cold warrior to an apostle of peace, remains to inspire a ray of hope in these dark days. As recounted by James Douglass in his masterful JFK and the Unspeakable, Kennedy agreed to a meeting in May 1962 with a group of Quakers who had been demonstrating outside the While House for total disarmament.They urged him to move in that direction.Kennedy was sympathetic to their position.He said he wished it were easy to do so from the top down, but that he was being pressured by the Pentagon and others to never do that, although he had given a speech urging “a peace race” together with the Soviet Union. He told the Quakers it would have to come from below.According to the Quakers, JFK listened intently to their points, and before they left said with a smile,
“You believe in redemption don’t you?”
Soon Kennedy was shaken to his core by the Cuban missile crisis when the world teetered on the brink of extinction and his insane military and “intelligence” advisers urged him to wage a nuclear war.Not long after, he took a sharp top-down turn toward peace despite their fierce opposition, a turn so dramatic over the next year that it led to his martyrdom.And he knew it would.He knew it would.
So hope is not all lost.There are great souls like JFK to inspire us. Their examples flash here and there. But to even begin to hope to change the future, a confrontation with our demonic past (and present) is first necessary, a descent into the dark truth that is terrifying in its implications.False innocence must be abandoned.Carl Jung, in “On the Psychology of the Unconscious,” addressed this with the words:
It is a frightening thought that man also has a shadow side to him, consisting not just of little weaknesses – and foibles, but of a positively demonic dynamism. The individual seldom knows anything of this; to him, as an individual, it is incredible that he should ever in any circumstances go beyond himself. But let these harmless creatures form a mass, and there emerges a raging monster; and each individual is only one tiny cell in the monster’s body, so that for better or worse he must accompany it on its bloody rampages and even assist it to the utmost. Having a dark suspicion of these grim possibilities, man turns a blind eye to the shadow-side of human nature. Blindly he strives against the salutary dogma of original sin, which is yet so prodigiously true. Yes, he even hesitates to admit the conflict of which he is so painfully aware.
How can one describe men who would intentionally slaughter so many innocent people?American history is rife with such examples up to the present day.Iraq, Afghanistan, Libya, Syria, etc. – the list is very long.Savage wars carried out by men and women who own and run the country, and who try to buy the souls of regular people to join them in their pact with the devil, to acquiesce to their ongoing wicked deeds.Such monstrous evil was never more evident than on August 6 and 9, 1945.
Unless we enter into deep contemplation of the evil that was released into the world with those bombings of Hiroshima and Nagasaki, we are lost in a living hell without escape.And we will pay.Nemesis always demands retribution.We have gradually been accepting rule by those for whom the killing of innocents is child’s play, and we have been masquerading as innocent and good children for whom the truth is too much to bear.“Indeed, the safest road to Hell is the gradual one,” Screwtape the devil tells his nephew, Wormwood, a devil in training, “the gentle slope, soft underfoot, without sudden turnings, without milestones, without signposts.”That’s the road we’ve been traveling.
The projection of evil onto others works only so long.We must reclaim our shadows and withdraw our projections.Only the fate of the world depends on it.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Edward Curtin is a writer whose work has appeared widely. He is a frequent contributor to Global Research. He teaches sociology at Massachusetts College of Liberal Arts. His website is http://edwardcurtin.com/.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
At the end of the Second World War, what insidious minded cabal of powerfully influential Americans pressured President Truman to order these two genocidal nuclear war crimes without even consulting his top commanding generals?
Apart from them having been war crimes, the same as the incendiary bombing of some 60 other Japanese cities, the Atom bombing of Hiroshima and Nagasaki were acts of war committed while US warfare was being conducted under the commands of General Eisenhower andGeneral MacArthur. The two Atomic bombs were dropped without their approval and without their being informed beforehand.
General Douglas MacArthur, Commander of United States Army Forces in the Far East, who was not consulted before the atom bombing and destruction of two Japanese cities, saw no military justification for the dropping of the bomb.“The war might have ended weeks earlier,” he said, “if the United States had agreed, as it later did anyway, to the retention of the institution of the emperor.” [1] “Japan was already defeated and that dropping the bomb was completely unnecessary,” wrote Supreme Allied Commander Gen. Dwight Eisenhower, [2]“the Japanese were ready to surrender and it wasn’t necessary to hit them with that awful thing.”[3]
Six years before the outbreak of WW II, as major US corporations began the rearming of Germany with US government acquiescence if not support, Franklin Delano Roosevelt, the last wealthy aristocratic insider US President, wrote to his confidant Colonel House,
“as you and I know, this government has been owned by a financial element in the centers of power since the days of Andrew Jackson.”[4]
(Jackson had been US president a hundred years earlier).
FDR most certainly meant that they both knew that the government “owned by a financial element” included all three branches, Legislative, Executive and Judicial, and therefore Congress, the Supreme Court and the Presidency.
So, after Roosevelt died, or was poisoned [?],[5] persons, within that “financial element in the centers of power,” got to pressure ‘ordinary Joe’ Harry Truman to decide to incinerate hundreds of thousands of women, children, and ordinary Japanese men, young and old, to make an impression on the Russians, most of whose cities lay half in ruins among 26 million dead Soviet citizens.
AND…according to Scott Ritter,[6]
by August 30, 1945, a scant twenty-four days after the Japanese city of Hiroshima was subjected to nuclear holocaust, and ten days after Stalin ordered the acceleration of the Soviet bomb project, General Leslie Groves, who was in charge of the manufacture of Atomic bombs, was presented with a document that listed Soviet cities and industrial facilities, along with a calculation as to how many atomic bombs would be required to destroy each targeted area (Moscow and Leningrad were each assigned six atomic bombs). [7]
That “financial element in the centers of power,” that FDR wrote “owned the government,” was destined to be labelled ‘the Military-Industrial-Complex which would force President Eisenhower to commit many horrific crimes against humanity in Vietnam, Laos, Congo and Guatemala, and threaten to Atomic bomb North Korea (whose 38 cities had already been bombed flat).
During the Year Before WW II, As Fascism Was Being Promoted in Europe President Franklin Roosevelt Described Fascism in the USA
In April of 1938, as fascist Italian and Nazi German warplanes mercilessly bombed Republican Spain in support of the fascist revolt, while the US, Britain and France adhered to their non-intervention policy, Roosevelt addressed Congress and spoke of fascism in the United States of America.
“Unhappy events abroad have retaught us two simple truths about the liberty of a democratic people. The first truth is that the liberty of a democracy is not safe if the people tolerate the growth of private power to a point where it becomes stronger than their democratic state itself.That, in its essence, isFascism—ownership of Government by an individual, by a group, or by any other controlling private power. … Statistics of the Bureau of Internal Revenue reveal the following amazing figures for 1935: Of all corporations reporting from every part of the nation, one-tenth of 1 per cent of them owned 52 per cent of the assets of all of them;”[8]
Shall we not understand the use of nuclear weapons and continually threatening to do so again, to be the result of fascism in the USA. President Roosevelt had been against dropping the A- bomb and had looked to negotiate a peaceful world with the Russians, who had suffered so inexpressively great death and destruction from the Nazi invasion during the war before finally destroying the German armies.
Or, shall we understand the crimes against humanity including the use of nuclear weapons on civilians in cities to have been committed by democracy and under a democratic system of government?
Image on the right: Ramsey Clark was renowned for being a strong advocate in defense of people at disadvantage against the U.S. establishment at home and abroad. | Photo: Twitter/@NehandaRadio
Former US Attorney General Ramsey Clark, son of a Supreme Court Justice understood all this genocidal mayhem as having nothing to do with any American democracy or democratic system:
Former US Attorney General Ramsey Clark held that
“The United States is not a democracy, it is a plutocracy. The people don’t rule in the United States. Wealth rules, the corporations rule. They rule the Congress, they elect the president, they run the Pentagon. They own the media, which are the voices of the plutocracy”. [9]
A ‘plutocracy’ (Greek: πλοῦτος, ploutos, ‘wealth’ and κράτος, kratos, ‘power’) or plutarchy is a society that is ruled or controlled by people of great wealth or income.
The term plutocracy is generally used as a pejorative to describe or warn against an undesirable condition, and thatnations may become plutocratic through kleptocracy or rent-seeking.
Kleptocracy by definition is rule by thieves.
Is this Hiroshima anniversary article about thieves (fascists) having their top government official mega mass murdering with nuclear weapons under the mainstream media backed excuse of making the Japanese surrender? More urgently, should not the Hiroshima and Nagasaki nuclear bombings remind the world of the continuing super expensive activity in the invention and manufacture of ever more dangerous nuclear weapons and high tech delivery systems, while criminal media hypes a necessity for nuclear confrontation with designated adversaries China, Russia, Iran and North Korea?
In 1986, in his forward to nuclear physicist Micho Kaku’s ‘To Win a Nuclear War: The Pentagon’s Secret War Plans.’ Ramsey Clark Described His Government As Humanity’s Ever More Threatening and Treacherous Enemy and His Warning Is More Valid that Ever
“The consistent underlying psychology of the United States, which has held the lead in nuclear war capability and capacity throughout these 40 [now 76] years, should be understandable to anyone who has ever known a violent neighborhood bully. The government of Americans means to have its way through the use and threatened to use of superior force. It will lie. It will deceive. It will kill. It will escalate the threat and use of force to the highest level it dares. It will bluff, dangerous as that can be. It will do whatever is must to dominate. It does this in the face of the fact that its very preparation for a nuclear war may destroy all life. American war planners busily devised strategies for crippling the Soviet Union with revealing names like BROILER, FROLIC, SIZZLE, SHAKEDOWN, DROPSHOT, and VULTURE. The number of Soviet targets to be destroyed grew in number from 20 cities in December 1945 to 200 cities in 1949 and to 3261 total targets by 1957. The number of times the use of nuclear weapons has been contemplated by Americans is unbearable.
What is to be said of leaders with the mental acuity and moral perceptions revealed by these disclosed words and deeds? They are at best enemies of life without understanding. Psychologically, they disconnect all feeling for the beauty of the planet — a rose, an impala in motion, a baby’s hand, a Confucian analect, a Bach cantata, a parable of Jesus, pilgrims bathing in the Ganges, a crowd watching a soccer game in Rio, the subway in Moscow, the skyline in Manhattan. They cannot think or feel about the human meaning of what they do.
A single Trident II submarine can inflict more death than all prior wars in history. Twenty-four missiles, launched while submerged, each with seventeen independently targeted, maneuverable nuclear warheads five times more powerful than the atom bomb that destroyed Nagasaki, can travel 5,000 nautical miles to strike within 300 feet of 408 predetermined targets. Nuclear winter might follow even if no other weapons are used.
No nation or individual can be permitted to possess the power to destroy the world. An imperative need is for an informed and active public struggling for its right to survive.”
By now the public should be able to understand that the most dangerous “financial element in the centers of power” is the powerful group of investors in war mostly centered in the Wall Street port area of New York City’s island of Manhattan and that their nefarious reach is world wide.
Witness America’s ally the British launching of its new Trident submarine along with the announcement that it is increasing its production of nuclear warheads and claims the right to use nuclear weapons without explaining Britain’s right to endanger the lives of everyone on Earth and the Earth’s ability to sustain life.[10]
This is our present planetary predicament, but no situation, especially absurd situations, lasts forever. People asleep eventually wake up, of course not always in time, as in the cases of the First and Second World Wars, whose preparations went on in front of everyone’s noses and mesmerized silent acquiescence just as do all the extreme resources expenditure in nuclear weaponry today.
Conclusion
With the financial and human resources needed for humankind survival from the effects of global warming and planetary degradation it is apparent or will be apparent eventually that the present expenditure of financial and human resources on nuclear war preparation and ongoing wars may doom a viable future existence for a majority of the human race and its planetary home as we know it.
CIA overseen Western monopolized media continues to portray a contest between democracy and communism and socialism, but the real age old continuing cold war has been between plutocratic dictatorship or fascism and communist led socialism.
The memory of the horror of Hiroshima, should remind everyone of the danger and insanity of today’s frightening hair trigger nuclear confrontation currently promoted by the US government seemingly as ‘business as usual.’ Russian and Chinese cities as well as US cities remain targeted for nuclear destruction.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Jay Janson is an archival research peoples historian activist, musician and renowned writer
Notes
1. Norman Cousins, The Pathology of Power, pg. 65, 70-71.
2. Dwight Einsenhower, Mandate For Change, pg. 38
3. Newsweek, 11/11/63
4. Letter to Col. Edward Mandell House (21 November 1933); as quoted in F.D.R.: His Personal Letters, 1928-1945, edited by Elliott Roosevelt (New York: Duell, Sloan and Pearce, 1950), pg. 373
5. In April 1945, the end of World War II was finally in sight. Franklin Delano Roosevelt, recently elected to an unprecedented fourth term as president, was at his Warm Springs, Georgia, retreat, sitting for a painting. He reminded the artist that she only had 15 more minutes to work, then complained of a sudden, blinding headache, lost consciousness, and died.
Quite frankly, even someone as suspicious as I would have bought that story, hook, line, and sinker. Roosevelt had been in bad health for years, after a bout with polio left him dependent upon crutches or a wheelchair.
But within four years of Roosevelt’s demise, a book titled The Strange Death of Franklin D. Roosevelt was published. And while speculation about Roosevelt’s death has remained in the background, over the years it has continued to be one of the most persistent conspiracy theories out there. Even the infamous Colonel X of Oliver Stone’s JFK, L. Fletcher Prouty, has weighed in on the question. So there it is: was Roosevelt murdered or did he die by natural causes?
The fact of the matter is that all presidents accumulate enemies, And Roosevelt’s views in certain areas were likely to have created even more enemies for him. For instance, he:
Opposed using the atomic bomb on Japan Opposed establishing Israel Intended to dismantle the various British colonies scattered across the globe and help them become self-governing nations.
Just those positions alone would have painted a bull’s-eye on him several times over. Yes, FDR had his share of enemies, but could he have been murdered? What do those who buy into this idea hang their hats on?
Mostly, the “evidence” consists of allegations that cannot, today, be proven without exhuming Roosevelt’s body and conducting a full forensic examination. His last breakfast was supposedly laced with cyanide. His body turned black within hours of his death, an alleged result of arsenic poisoning. Although Georgia law demanded an autopsy, as in the case of JFK twenty years later, Roosevelt’s body was whisked out of the state without the legally mandated autopsy by state officials. That’s not an unsubstantiated allegation; that did happen. But that it was done for some nefarious reason is unsubstantiated.
The suspects are fascinating as well. Bill Hanson, in his book Closely Guarded Secrets, lays blame on the Nazis. Colonel Prouty says that Stalin advised presidential son Elliott Roosevelt that the “Churchill gang” had his father murdered, because they were afraid FDR’s postwar plans would destroy British influence around the globe. This was accomplished by a program of poisoning begun at the famous Yalta Conference and perhaps continued at Warm Springs. Emanuel Josephson, author of The Strange Death of Franklin D. Roosevelt, points out that one of Roosevelt’s closest aides, General Edwin Watson, became suddenly ill and died on the return from Yalta, the implication being that he had been poisoned as well.
It is easy to make these claims, but difficult to back them up at this late date.The Murder of Franklin Delano Roosevelt
6. Scott Ritter is a former Marine Corps intelligence officer who served in the former Soviet Union implementing arms control treaties, in the Persian Gulf during Operation Desert Storm, and in Iraq overseeing the disarmament of WMD.
7. ATOMIC BOMBINGS AT 75: The Decision to Drop the Bomb on Japan and the Genesis of the Cold War
August 5, 2020, ConsortiumNews.com
The views expressed are solely those of the author and may or may not reflect those of Consortium News.
ISBN Number: 978-0-9737147-5-3
Year: 2012
Pages: 102 Print Edition: $10.25 (+ shipping and handling) PDF Edition: $6.50 (sent directly to your email account!)
Michel Chossudovsky is Professor of Economics at the University of Ottawa and Director of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG), which hosts the critically acclaimed website www.globalresearch.ca . He is a contributor to the Encyclopedia Britannica. His writings have been translated into more than 20 languages.
Reviews
“This book is a ‘must’ resource – a richly documented and systematic diagnosis of the supremely pathological geo-strategic planning of US wars since ‘9-11’ against non-nuclear countries to seize their oil fields and resources under cover of ‘freedom and democracy’.” –John McMurtry, Professor of Philosophy, Guelph University
“In a world where engineered, pre-emptive, or more fashionably “humanitarian” wars of aggression have become the norm, this challenging book may be our final wake-up call.” -Denis Halliday, Former Assistant Secretary General of the United Nations
Michel Chossudovsky exposes the insanity of our privatized war machine. Iran is being targeted with nuclear weapons as part of a war agenda built on distortions and lies for the purpose of private profit. The real aims are oil, financial hegemony and global control. The price could be nuclear holocaust. When weapons become the hottest export of the world’s only superpower, and diplomats work as salesmen for the defense industry, the whole world is recklessly endangered. If we must have a military, it belongs entirely in the public sector. No one should profit from mass death and destruction. –Ellen Brown, author of ‘Web of Debt’ and president of the Public Banking Institute
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
In David Oshinsky’s fine biography of Senator Joseph McCarthy (A Conspiracy so Immense) we learn of the political climate in the early 1950s concerning the (supposed) threat of Communism.
What many do not understand about Sen. McCarthy was that he was not the first or the only force in this movement to uncover this ‘Red Menace’.
In 1950, state and local governments actually competed to see who would ‘crack down hardest’ on this Communist threat.
What I am about to repeat from Oshinsky’s book is not satire or any sort of humor… though it can be construed as such. Here goes:
Indiana forced professional wrestlers to sign a Loyalty Oath. Ohio declared Communists ineligible for unemployment benefits. Pennsylvania barred them from all state programs with but one exception – blind Communists would be cared for. In good ole Nebraska each school district was directed to inspect textbooks for ‘Foreign ideas’, and to set aside a few hours each week for the singing of patriotic songs. Birmingham, Alabama, ordered all Communists to leave town. Jacksonville, Florida, ( the state where ‘off the radar of reason’ Governor DeSantis now rules ) made it a crime to communicate with a former or present Red. When the city council of McKeesport, Pennsylvania, discussed a similar proposal, two Communists appeared to lobby against the passage of this order. One of them was jailed for ‘Disorderly conduct’. The other was run out of town.
In the Spring of that year, 1950, the anti Communist rhetoric paid big dividends in the primary elections. In California, Richard Nixon won the GOP Senatorial primary by red baiting President Truman. Nixon said, “The Commies don’t like it when I smash into him, but the more the Communists yell, the surer that I am in bringing the Red danger to the attention of the voters.”
With this pandemic still strangling us with its Delta Variant tentacles, the (what I call them) “Neo Fascists:” and the party they belong to are in full force.
The right wing media and internet sites are filled with rhetoric labeling anyone who wants to improve our general welfare as being ‘Socialists and Communists’. President Joe Biden, whom this writer has lambasted for decades for being a Neo Con empire loving tool, is now called a Red, as are most of his party.
This is the guy who still refuses (as did his buddy Obama and Ms Hillary) support for Medicare for All, cutting this obscene military spending, closing many of our 1000+ foreign military bases, and really taxing the Super Rich instead of through candy schemes. Yet, the pendulum and moral compass have become so out of whack that many Americans are confused… except of course the MAGA crowd. Imagine a governor of a state actually creating a law through his minions in the statehouse which gives license for a driver to run over protestors if they get in the way. No consequences at all, just plow into them, even if they are peaceful First Amendment citizens, as once again ‘Right wing might makes right’. However, this governor, DeSantis, will overlook it when it is those patriotic Anti Communist Cubans in Miami who may be out there doing the rioting.
You see, the way this Neo Fascist mindset operates, if the pandemic began in China, and China is (technically) Communist, then it was a Communist attack on us.
If the federal government wants us to all be vaccinated and wear face masks during this variant surge, that is another signal that we are under a Communist or Socialist agenda. As the fool in Tallahassee continues to keep Florida open for business and schooling, with NO mandates or restrictions…. our state now accounts for 25% of the new cases of Covid, though Florida only has but less than 15% or our nation’s population.
Yet, instead of having a real ‘War on the Pandemic’ both the Republicans and Democrats still wish to create a new and better Cold War! Leading the charge, sadly, are many of the evangelicals and Zionists who find time to run to church each Sunday (and synagogue on Saturday) praying for their God to deliver them from this Red Menace.
If only the Jesus that I study and admire could make that visit to our crazy world and start running the lot of them out of their Churches and Temples.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Philip A Farruggio is regular columnist on It’s the Empire… stupid website. He is also frequently posted on Nation of Change, and Countercurrents.org. He is the son and grandson of Brooklyn NYC longshoremen and a graduate of Brooklyn College, class of 1974. Since the 2000 election debacle Philip has written over 400 columns on the Military Industrial Empire and other facets of life in an upside down America. He is also host of the ‘It’s the Empire… Stupid‘ radio show, co produced by Chuck Gregory. Philip can be reached at [email protected]
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
As George W. Bush entered the White House on 20 January 2001, having been granted a controversial election victory, his cabinet swiftly drew up a particularly hawkish foreign policy program. This included identifying a number of strategically important states to gain full ascendancy over, through military attack if needs be, and among the first countries selected for invasion was Afghanistan.
Due to America’s declining oil and natural gas stocks, the top priority for president Bush was to increase US influence over rich fossil fuel sources, constructing pipelines, refineries and other such infrastructure.
Contrary to what numerous mainstream outlets have claimed over the past two decades, the Bush administration was planning its invasion of Afghanistan before the 9/11 attacks on America, which were then used as a pretext for armed intervention. Niaz Naik, Pakistan’s experienced former foreign secretary, has provided testimony on this.
Naik informed the BBC a week after 9/11 how he was told by senior US officials, in mid-July 2001, that Washington was preparing military action against Afghanistan (1). Naik was informed by the Americans that their invasion of Afghanistan would begin, at the latest, in the middle of October 2001, before the first Afghan snow flurries arrived. The US Armed Forces would launch their attack from bases in Tajikistan, the Central Asian country, which borders Afghanistan to the north. US advisers were present in Tajikistan by the summer of 2001.
Consequently, Bush was planning to wage a war in Afghanistan at least 8 weeks prior to the 9/11 atrocities, and indeed most probably longer than that. Naik’s comments are supported by General Hamid Gul, the former head of ISI, Pakistan’s leading intelligence agency. General Gul believed that US plans to engage militarily in Afghanistan “predated 9/11” (2). It is not terribly surprising that he came to such a conclusion. The 9/11 attacks obviously occurred on 11 September 2001, while the US-led invasion of Afghanistan commenced on 7 October 2001 – that is 26 days after 9/11.
It is not possible to prepare and initiate a large-scale military assault in less than 4 weeks, especially against a country on the other side of the world. As any commander would surely admit the planning alone takes months, before the offensive can begin.
US drones, such as the RQ-1 Predator, were hovering above the Afghan skies before 9/11. These unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs) were partaking in reconnaissance sorties, and collecting other information about Afghanistan, in preparation for the invasion. A US military operation in Afghanistan was not concerned with either “combating terrorists” or capturing Osama bin Laden, the Al Qaeda chief. President Bush said 5 months after the offensive had begun on 13 March 2002, “I am truly not that concerned about him [Bin Laden]”. The authenticity of this remark was confirmed by White House transcripts. (3)
As early as December 2001 Bin Laden was not even in Afghanistan. He was instead further south in Pakistan’s tribal regions (4). US General Tommy Franks, the commander overseeing the military operations in Afghanistan, insisted just one month into the invasion on 8 November 2001, “We have not said that Osama bin Laden is a target of this effort”.
The Chairman of the US Joint Chiefs of Staff, General Richard Myers, outlined how “our goal has never been to get Bin Laden”. (5)
What of Bush’s state of mind? He reportedly informed diplomats at an Israel-Palestine summit in Egypt during June 2003, “I am driven with a mission from God” who the president said had told him “’George, go and fight these terrorists in Afghanistan’” and “’George, go and end the tyranny in Iraq’. And I did” (6). Incredibly, the former CIA director Robert Gates (image left) acknowledged in his memoirs that those in Washington, including himself, had little comprehension of Afghanistan as a country.
The Americans didn’t understand its complex tribal make-up, ethnic groups and rivalries. Gates wrote that, “nearly always, we begin military engagements – wars – profoundly ignorant about our adversaries and about the situation on the ground”. (7)
One need only glance at Afghanistan’s position on the map, in south-central Asia, to grasp why Bush’s White House was so interested in that country. Afghanistan is situated close to the oil and gas rich Middle East, while it lies beside the former Soviet republics of Central Asia. This century, it has been discovered that Afghanistan contains millions of tons of lucrative mineral resources, from copper and gold to lithium (8). Afghanistan’s mineral wealth was well known in Washington, as the assessment of its natural resources was conducted in part by the US Geological Survey, a scientific branch of the American government.
Furthermore, Bush’s neoconservative officials wanted to construct oil and gas pipelines across Afghan terrain, to benefit US energy corporations. Bush is a former Texas oil executive dating to the 1970s, and his presidential campaign in 2000 received large donations from American fossil fuel firms, such as ExxonMobil. This assisted in him winning the White House (9). Vice-president Dick Cheney was, from 1995 to 2000, the chief executive of Halliburton, a noted US energy company. Cheney’s close links to the oil industry would continue for many years.
Condoleezza Rice, Bush’s National Security Advisor and then Secretary of State, was a director for 10 years at the Chevron Corporation, America’s third biggest oil company and the largest investor in the resource rich Caspian Sea (a body of water located a few hundred miles north-west of Afghanistan). Rice resigned from her position at Chevron on 15 January 2001, and five days later she became the National Security Advisor. Chevron had previously named an oil tanker after her, the “Condoleezza Rice”. (10)
Other Bush officials were centrally involved in the oil business, like the Commerce Secretary Donald Evans, a close friend of the president’s. Worth mentioning too is Zalmay Khalilzad, the Afghan-born American diplomat who Bush relied upon for information on Afghanistan. In the 1990s, the pro-war Khalilzad worked for a time as a consultant to the US oil giant UNOCAL (Union Oil Company of California), which was involved in constructing a Trans-Afghanistan Pipeline, to run from the Caspian Sea through Afghanistan. (11)
Part of the thinking behind the US invasion of Afghanistan, was to allow UNOCAL to build two other oil pipelines: one across Afghanistan through neighbouring Pakistan to the Indian Ocean, while the other – the Central Asia Oil Pipeline Project (CAOPP) – would stretch for 1,050 miles from Chardzhou in Turkmenistan, which borders Afghanistan.
The Brazilian historian Moniz Bandeira wrote of US thinking, “This would prevent Azerbaijani oil from passing through Russia. And this objective was clear” (12). There were also plans to build a gas pipeline, from Uzbekistan through Afghanistan and on to Pakistan. A main factor in US government strategy was to further erode Russian strength, by moving into its previous domains, Central Asia and the Caucasus, with Afghanistan being a pawn in the great game. American control over Central Asia would in addition hamper Chinese power, while a US presence in the region posed a significant threat to arch enemy Iran.
The Americans had, since 1997, been conducting an array of military exercises in Central Asia. Three years before, they had established NATO’s so-called Partnership for Peace Program, with the ex-Soviet republics in mind. Bill Richardson, the Energy Secretary to Bush’s predecessor Bill Clinton, said that the one-time Soviet states were “all about America’s energy security” and “it’s very important to us that the pipeline map and politics come out right”. (13)
Bush was intent on gaining mastery over oil sources outside of the volatile Middle East, which there was no guarantee they could continue relying on. Some estimates in Washington indicated that the US could obtain, from the largely untapped wells of Central Asia, over 80% of America’s entire oil needs by the year 2050. (14)
US planners were focusing increasingly on the major fossil fuel reserves in the Caspian Sea, our planet’s largest landlocked source of water, considerably bigger in size than Britain. In 1998 Cheney, who was then an adviser to the Central Asian countries regarding oil infrastructure, had said, “I cannot think of a time when we had a region emerge as suddenly to become as strategically significant as the Caspian” (15). Its waters flow across the frontiers of Iran, Russia, Kazakhstan, Turkmenistan and Azerbaijan.
The 9/11 attacks provided the White House with a remarkable justification to expand US global hegemony (16). Almost immediately following 9/11, Washington ramped up its military presence in Central Asia. By February 2002, the Americans had established bases in each of the five Central Asian states. This would facilitate US Army operations in nearby Afghanistan. Moreover, the Central Asian country of Turkmenistan contains the 6th largest gas reserves in the world, while Kazakhstan possesses the 12th biggest oil sources on earth and the 10th largest coal deposits.
The US military mission was supposedly to fight a “war on terror” in Afghanistan, for humanitarian purposes. This was, of course, propaganda relayed to the public through a pliant and naive media. It is not feasible to overcome terrorism by force of arms, and this in fact greatly exacerbates the problem; somewhat like smashing a hornet’s nest with a sledgehammer. Far from pursuing a war against terrorism, the US government was attempting to augment its world power and imperial goals, in order for example as Bandeira wrote “to ensure an environment that would make the construction of pipelines by the Union Oil Company of California (UNOCAL) possible, carrying the oil from Uzbekistan to the Indian Ocean”. (17)
UNOCAL would in 2005 be taken over by Chevron, the same corporation where Rice, the National Security Advisor, was formerly a board member. The Bush regime wanted also to assume control over the resource plenty Caucasus, particularly Azerbaijan, as the Third Reich had attempted to do 60 years before. Azerbaijan and Georgia, two former Soviet states, were essential in the transport of heavy American weaponry and NATO troops, which would be bound for Afghanistan not far to the east of Azerbaijan.
Germany’s president Horst Köhler said years later, in an interview over the radio, that German soldiers operating alongside the Americans were stationed abroad “to protect our interests, for example free trade routes” (18). Köhler let slip that the thousands of German troops under the NATO banner, such as in Afghanistan, were not there to fight terrorism after all, but their role was to safeguard Western commercial interests. Köhler was promptly forced to resign the presidency, because his comments were presumably too close to the mark.
Following the Soviet Union’s collapse, NATO has become a worldwide intervention force, still firmly under US auspices. During this time, NATO has executed often brutal military actions such as in Bosnia (from the early 1990s), Yugoslavia (1999), Afghanistan (from 2001) and Libya (2011). Among NATO’s aims are, as its secretary-general Jaap de Hoop Scheffer remarked bluntly in June 2007, “NATO troops have to guard pipelines that transport oil and gas that is directed for the West”; and to protect sea routes used by oil tankers along with other “crucial infrastructure” of the world energy system. So much for NATO’s stated goal of countering “Russian aggression”.
While Bush and company in the first months of 2001 were formulating their invasion of Afghanistan, at about the same time they were starting to sketch plans to overthrow Saddam Hussein in Iraq. Two months into the Bush presidency, in March 2001 vice-president Cheney’s Energy Task Force had already developed maps outlining the oil refineries, pipelines and terminals that the US would construct in Iraq, once they had toppled Saddam through military force. (19)
These plans were beginning about 6 months before 9/11. Saddam was once a valued US ally, and his human rights violations were ignored when he was obeying orders. By early this century, however, Saddam was showing too much independence. The Iraqi dictator had signed contracts with Russia’s energy firm, Lukoil; he was pursuing talks with the French multinational Total, a fossil fuel corporation; while he was substituting the dollar for the euro as the currency for oil transactions. (20)
*
Note to readers: please click the share buttons above or below. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Shane Quinn obtained an honors journalism degree. He is interested in writing primarily on foreign affairs, having been inspired by authors like Noam Chomsky. He is a frequent contributor to Global Research.
Notes
1 BBC News, “US ‘planned attack on Taleban’ [Afghanistan]”, 18 September 2001
2 Luiz Alberto Moniz Bandeira, The Second Cold War: Geopolitics and the Strategic Dimensions of the USA (Springer 1st ed., 23 June 2017) p. 31
3 Ibid., p. 143
4 Arnaud de Borchgrave, “Elvis bin Laden”, Atlantic Council, 27 July 2010
5 Jeremy R. Hammond, “Ex-ISI Chief says Purpose of New Afghan Intelligence Agency RAMA is ‘to destabilize Pakistan’”, Foreign Policy Journal, 12 August 2009
6 Ewen MacAskill, “George Bush: ‘God told me to end the tyranny in Iraq’”, The Guardian, 7 October 2005
7 Robert Gates, Duty: Memoirs of a Secretary at War (Knopf; 14 January 2014) End chapter, Reflections
8 Charles Q. Choi, “Rare Earth: Afghanistan sits on $1 trillion in minerals”, NBC, 5 September 2014
9 Brendan Montague, “George W. Bush elected in 2000 ‘floating on oil money’”, The Ecologist, 5 October 2018
11 Graham Winfrey, “Bush’s oil cronies: Where are they now?”, Business Insider, 25 January 2010
12 Bandeira, The Second Cold War, p. 41
13 John Pilger, The New Rulers Of The World (Verso Books, 20 February 2003) p. 111
14 Bandeira, The Second Cold War, p. 29
15 Pilger, The New Rulers Of The World, p. 110
16 Ibid., p. 109
17 Bandeira, The Second Cold War, p. 45
18 Sebastian Fischer, Veit Medick, “Köhler sparked a new war debate”, Der Spiegel, 27 May 2010
19 Bandeira, The Second Cold War, p. 81
20 Ibid.
Featured image: George W. Bush visits Hamid Karzai, who participated in the Mujahideen in the past and led the puppet government that replaced the Taliban.
In this new and expanded edition of Michel Chossudovsky’s 2002 best seller, the author blows away the smokescreen put up by the mainstream media, that 9/11 was an attack on America by “Islamic terrorists”. Through meticulous research, the author uncovers a military-intelligence ploy behind the September 11 attacks, and the cover-up and complicity of key members of the Bush Administration.
The expanded edition, which includes twelve new chapters focuses on the use of 9/11 as a pretext for the invasion and illegal occupation of Iraq, the militarisation of justice and law enforcement and the repeal of democracy.
According to Chossudovsky, the “war on terrorism” is a complete fabrication based on the illusion that one man, Osama bin Laden, outwitted the $40 billion-a-year American intelligence apparatus. The “war on terrorism” is a war of conquest. Globalisation is the final march to the “New World Order”, dominated by Wall Street and the U.S. military-industrial complex.
September 11, 2001 provides a justification for waging a war without borders. Washington’s agenda consists in extending the frontiers of the American Empire to facilitate complete U.S. corporate control, while installing within America the institutions of the Homeland Security State.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
So far most Covid deaths resulted from withholding treatment with known cures.Note that health authorities approved the use on emergency basis of an untested vaccine whose efficacy and safety was unknown, but the same alleged “Covid Crisis” was not used to justify the use of known cures on an emergency basis. Health authorities claimed they did not have official clinical trials proving the safety of HCQ and Ivermectin as a Covid treatment even though both had been used for many decades without adverse effects for treatment of lupus and malaria prevention and other dangers. In many countries HCQ and Ivermectin are available over the counter without prescription.
If the dire predictions of some experts about the threat the spike protein “vaccine” poses to health and longevity are on the mark, the vaccines will sicken and kill many multiples of those who died from the Covid virus.
Greg Hunter is a former TV reporter who would not lie for the establishment and was fired.His interviews are with qualified dissidents who challenge the official narratives and are well worth watching.
*
International award winning journalist and former Assistant Treasury Secretary Dr. Paul Craig Roberts says the evidence is clear Covid vaccines are not safe and effective. Dr. Roberts says,
“So, why the push for overriding everyone’s civil rights to vaccinate when you have information it doesn’t protect. It doesn’t reduce infections, and we have all these cases of illnesses caused by the vaccine. We also see Biden saying, quick, let’s give it full approval. Why do they want to give it full approval? If they have to admit there are cures after all, they have to stop using the vaccine. This will affect the profits. This will affect all the inflated stock prices of the vaccine companies. They will all collapse. . . . So, they are protecting the investment in the Covid deception.”
Roberts also points out,
“We have a government pushing forward with a policy that Pfizer’s own internal documents show it is 120% erroneous. That is what needs to be explained. Why, when the information is now out, and not just on the internet, but in the presstitute media itself in the New York Times and in the Washington Post. We now know the vaccine (Pfizer) does quote, ‘nothing to reduce the overall risk of death from Covid,’ closed quote. The so-called ‘breakthroughs’ are concentrated among the vaccinated, not among the unvaccinated. Also, the vaccinated spread the virus as easily as the unvaccinated. This is in the internal (Pfizer) document that got out, and it’s been in the New York Times and the Washington Post. . . . It also says to proceed with vaccination is a huge serious mistake. It makes no sense. . . . There are agendas that they kept secret. We know one of them is profit. One of them is control. Then the question remains, are there other darker agendas such as population control? Did they want a vaccine that makes women infertile? Did they want a vaccine that kills people in order to reduce population? We don’t know. But given that they are pushing ahead to vaccinate the unvaccinated when they know for a fact it is going to do more harm than good, it gives a lot of credibility to the so-called conspiracy theories.”
Dr. Roberts also points out, only a small number of the adverse vaccine reactions are reported. Roberts says for a more accurate number, multiply the 1.8 million European injuries and 18,000 to 20,000 deaths by a factor of 10. Roberts says,
“You get 18 million injuries and 200,000 deaths in Europe. Do the same math in America, and you get a huge number, and that is only the United States and Europe. So, clearly, these potential numbers far exceed the exaggerated amount of Covid deaths. . . . The fear generated in the first year of Covid makes people terrified, and it leads them to get the vaccine. . . . Now, they are getting confused, and they are telling the vaccinated you are not protected, you have to wear a mask even though you are vaccinated. . . . This is the reason the narrative is falling apart. This is also why they are so determined to get the experimental basis off so it won’t be challenged by cures . . .such as Ivermectin and HCQ.”
Dr. Roberts contends,
“They are withholding cures from people so they can continue the vaccine profits. This is grounds for arrest and indictment of every one of them: Fauci, the Head of the FDA, the Head of the CDC and everybody involved. This is legitimate evidence for arresting them, indicting them and putting them on trial. They killed people for vaccine profits by withholding cures. . . . The deaths from Covid, but they would not let them use HCQ, Ivermectin, and now they are blocking a cure from Eli Lilly. This, I think, is the only case we need to make. . . . We have proof they withheld treatment. We know that. It’s not speculative and not a theory. It is an absolute known fact. They withheld treatment, and they are continuing to withhold treatment so they can sell a vaccine.”
Watch the interview below.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
Dr. Paul Craig Roberts is a frequent contributor to Global Research.
All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).
Seyyed Ebrahim Raisi was sworn in as the 8th president of Iran this Thursday at the Majlis (Parliament), two days after being formally endorsed by Leader of the Islamic Revolution Ayatollah Khamenei.
Representatives of the UN secretary-general; OPEC; the EU; the Eurasia Economic Union (EAEU); the Inter-Islamic Union; and quite a few heads of state and Foreign Ministers were at the Majlis, including Iraq President Barham Salih and Afghan President Ashraf Ghani.
The Islamic Republic of Iran now enters a new era in more ways than one. Khamenei himself outlined its contours in a short, sharp speech, ‘The Experience of Trusting the US’.
Khamenei’s strategic analysis, conveyed even before the final result of the JCPOA negotiations in Vienna in 2015, which I covered in my Asia Times ebook Persian Miniatures, turned out to be premonitory: “During the negotiations I repeatedly said they don’t uphold their promises.” So, in the end, “the experience tells us this is a deadly poison for us.” During the Rouhani administration, Khamenei adds, “it became clear that trusting the West doesn’t work”.
With perfect timing, a new, six-volume book, Sealed Secret, co-written by outgoing Foreign Minister Javad Zarif and two top JCPOA negotiators, Ali Akbar Salehi and Seyed Abbas Araghchi (who’s still involved in the current, stalled Vienna debate) will be published this week, for the moment only in Farsi.
Professor Mohammad Marandi of the University of Tehran summed up for me the road map ahead:
“Iran’s foreign policy decisions are pretty clear. Iran will be putting less emphasis on Western nations, especially European, and more emphasis on the Global South, the East, neighboring countries, and of course that will include China and Russia. That doesn’t mean the Iranians are going to ignore Europe altogether, if they decide to return to the JCPOA. The Iranians would accept if they abide by their obligations. So far, we have seen no sign of that whatsoever.”
Marandi could not help referring to Khamenei’s speech:
“It’s pretty clear; he’s saying, ‘we don’t trust the West, these last 8 years showed that’, he’s saying the next administration should learn from the experience of these 8 years.”
Yet the main challenge for Raisi will not be foreign policy, but the domestic framework, with sanctions still biting hard:
“With regard to economic policy, it will be tilting more towards social justice and turning away from neoliberalism, expanding the safety net for the disenfranchised and the vulnerable.”
It’s quite intriguing to compare Marandi with the views of a seasoned Iranian diplomat who prefers to remain anonymous, and very well positioned as an observer of the domestic conflict:
“During Rouhani’s 8 years, contrary to the Supreme Leader’s advice, the government spent lots of time on negotiations, and they have not been investing on internal potential. Anyhow the 8 years are now finished, and contrary to Rouhani’s promises we currently have Iran’s worst economic and financial record in 50 years.”
The diplomat is adamant on “the importance of paying attention to our internal capacities and abilities, while having powerful economic relations with our neighbors as well as Russia, China, Latin America, South Africa as well as maintaining mutual respectable ties with Europeans and the US government, if it changes its behavior and accepts Iran as it is and not always trying to overthrow the Iranian state and harm its people by any possible means.”
Iranians are heirs to a tradition of at least 2,500 years of fine diplomacy. So once again our interlocutor had to stress, “the Supreme Leader has never, ever said or believed we should cut our relations with Europeans. Quite the opposite: he deeply believes in the notion of ‘dynamic diplomacy’, even concerning the US; he said multiple times we have no problem with the US if they deal with us with respect.”
And now, let’s time travel
There are no illusions in Tehran that Iran under Raisi, much more than under Rouhani, will remain the target of multiple “maximum pressure” and/or Hybrid War tactics deployed by Washington, Tel Aviv and NATOstan, crude false flags included, with the whole combo celebrated by US Think Tankland’s analyses penned by “experts” in Beltway cubicles.
All that is irrelevant in terms of what really matters ahead in the Southwest Asia chessboard.
The late, great René Grousset, in his 1951 classic L’Empire des Steppes, has pointed out “how Iran, renewing itself for fifty centuries”, has “always given proof of astonishing continuity.” It was because of this strength that Iranian civilization, as much as Chinese civilization, has assimilated all foreigners that conquered is soil, from Seljuks to Mongols: “Every time, because of the radiance of its culture, Iranism reappeared with renewed vitality, on the road to a new renaissance.”
The possibility of a “new renaissance”, now, implies a step beyond the “neither East or West” first conceptualized by Ayatollah Khomeini: it’s rather a back to the (Eurasian) roots, Iran reviving its past to tackle the new, multipolar, future.
The political heart of Iran lies in the sophisticated urban organization of the northern plateau, the result of a rolling, pluri-millennial process. All along Grousset’s “fifty centuries”, the plateau has been the house of Iranian culture and the stable heart of the state.
Around this central space there are plenty of territories historically and linguistically linked to Persia and Iran: in Eastern Anatolia, in Central Asia and Afghanistan, in the Caucasus, in Western Pakistan. Then there are Shi’ite territories of other ethnic groups, mostly Arab, in Iraq, Syria, Lebanon (Hezbollah), Yemen (the Zaidites) and the Persian Gulf (Bahrain, the Shi’ites in Hasa in Saudi Arabia).
This is the Shi’ite arc – evolving in a complex Iranization process that is foremost political and religious, and not cultural and linguistic. Outside of Iran, I have seen in my travels how Arab Shi’ites in Iraq, Lebanon and the Gulf, Dari/Farsi Shi’ites in Afghanistan, those of Pakistan and India, and Turcophone Shi’ites in Azerbaijan look up towards political Iran.
So Iran’s large zone of influence relies mostly on Shi’ism, and not on Islamic radicalism or the Persian language. It’s Shi’ism that allows political power in Iran to keep a Eurasian dimension – from Lebanon to Afghanistan and Central Asia – and that reflects once again Grousset’s “continuity” when he refers to Persian/Iranian history.
From Ancient History to the medieval era, it was always out of imperial projects, born in Southwest Asia and /or the Mediterranean basin, that came the drive to attempt the creation of a Eurasian territory.
The Persians, who were halfway between Mediterranean Europe and Central Asia, were the first who tried to build a Eurasian empire from Asia to the Mediterranean, but they were halted in their expansion towards Europe by the Greeks in the 5th century B.C.
Then it was up to Alexander The Great, in pure badass blitzkrieg mode, to venture all the way to Central Asia and India, de facto founding the first Eurasian empire. Which happened to materialize, to a large extent, the Persian empire.
Then something even more extraordinary happened: the simultaneous presence of the Parthian and Kushan empires between the Roman Empire and the Han Empire during the first two centuries of the first millennium.
It was this interaction that first allowed commercial and cultural trade and connectivity between the two extremities of Eurasia, between the Romans and the Han Chinese.
Yet the largest Eurasian territorial space, founded between the 7th and 10th centuries, following the Arab conquests, were the Umayyad and Abbasid Caliphates. Islam was at the heart of these Arab conquests, remixing previous imperial compositions, from Mesopotamia to the Persians, Greeks and Romans.
Historically, that was the first truly Eurasian economic, cultural and political arc, from the 8th to the 11th century, before Genghis Khan monopolized The Big Picture.
All that is very much alive in the collective unconscious of Iranians and Chinese. That’s why the China-Iran strategic partnership deal is much more than a mere $400 billion economic arrangement. It’s a graphic manifestation of what the revival of the Silk Roads is aiming at. And it looks like Khamenei had already seen which way the (desert) wind was blowing years before the fact.
*
Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
This article was originally published on Asia Times.
Pepe Escobar, born in Brazil, is a correspondent and editor-at-large at Asia Times and columnist for Consortium News and Strategic Culture in Moscow. Since the mid-1980s he’s lived and worked as a foreign correspondent in London, Paris, Milan, Los Angeles, Singapore, Bangkok. He has extensively covered Pakistan, Afghanistan and Central Asia to China, Iran, Iraq and the wider Middle East. Pepe is the author of Globalistan – How the Globalized World is Dissolving into Liquid War; Red Zone Blues: A Snapshot of Baghdad during the Surge. He was contributing editor to The Empire and The Crescent and Tutto in Vendita in Italy. His last two books are Empire of Chaos and 2030. Pepe is also associated with the Paris-based European Academy of Geopolitics. When not on the road he lives between Paris and Bangkok.
